You are on page 1of 260

JANOME ELECTRO PRESS

JP-S Series

Operation Manual
Functions

Thank you for purchasing a Janome Electro Press.

 Before using this press, please read this manual thoroughly


and always make sure you use the press correctly. In
particular, be sure to thoroughly read “For Your Safety” as it
contains important safety information.

 After reading this manual, store in a safe place that can be


easily accessed at any time by the operator.

 This manual is written according to IEC 62079.

 This controller is in accordance with IEC61800-5-1.


PREFACE

JANOME Electro Press is a servomotor press which can cleanly and quietly perform pressing,
caulking, bending, and other such operations on detailed objects with high precision and control over
the position and load.
In addition to versatile pressing functions, the Electro Press is equipped with various quality control
capabilities allowing you to establish a highly efficient production system.
There are several manuals pertaining to the Janome Electro Press JP-S Series.

For Your Safety This includes important information about safety. Be sure to read before use.
This manual explains how to set up the Electro Press and maintenance
Setup and operation.
Maintenance NOTE
For those who have knowledge of servo press installation and maintenance.
Functions This manual explains functions of the Electro Press.
Functions Explains the actual operation of the press with simple running samples.
PC Operation for
This manual explains PC operation for JP-S Designer.
JP-S Designer
Pendant Unit
This manual explains how to operate the pendant unit.
Operation
Note: Product specifications are regularly updated; therefore the content of this manual may differ from
the press in your possession.

The descriptions within this manual are based on standard specifications. The menu item names etc.
may vary depending on the model type.

This manual (2014-2 edition) corresponds with the system software V4.7. x and PC software V4.7. x.

To make full use of the machine’s functions and capability, make sure that
you use the press according to the correct handling/operation procedures
Attention that are written in this manual. Do not handle or operate the press in ways
not covered in this manual.

Functions 1 Electro Press JP-S


CONTENTS

PREFACE................................................................................................................................................ 1
CONTENTS............................................................................................................................................. 2
FOR YOUR SAFETY .............................................................................................................................. 5
Response to the EC Directive ........................................................................................................... 21
1. BASIC OPERATION OVERVIEW..................................................................................................... 22
1.1 Return to Home Position ............................................................................................................. 22
1.2 Move to Program Home Position (Work Home Position) ............................................................ 22
1.3 Program Run Overview ............................................................................................................... 22
1.4 External Command Runs ............................................................................................................ 23
1.5 JOG Movements (Low Speed Movements During Signal Input) ................................................ 23
1.6 External Control Overview ........................................................................................................... 23
1.7 Program Run Result Output Overview ........................................................................................ 24
2. DATA ORGANIZATION ..................................................................................................................... 25
2.1 Model/Adjustment Data ............................................................................................................... 26
2.1.1 Model .................................................................................................................................... 26
2.1.2 Adjustment Data.................................................................................................................... 27
2.2 Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 29
2.3 JOG Environment Settings .......................................................................................................... 30
2.4 Special Relay/Special Register Assignment................................................................................ 30
2.5 Position Zone Output ................................................................................................................... 31
2.6 Constant Load Movement Gain................................................................................................... 31
2.7 Programs ..................................................................................................................................... 32
3. PROGRAM RUNS ............................................................................................................................ 33
3.1 Program Data .............................................................................................................................. 35
3.1.1 Program Name...................................................................................................................... 36
3.1.2 Program Home Position........................................................................................................ 36
3.1.3 Approach ............................................................................................................................... 36
3.1.4 Probe..................................................................................................................................... 37
3.1.5 Return.................................................................................................................................... 38
3.2 Load Zone Sensor ....................................................................................................................... 39
3.3 Program Sensor........................................................................................................................... 42
3.3.1 Register of Sensor Difference ............................................................................................... 42
3.3.2 Register of Sensor Sum ........................................................................................................ 43
3.3.3 Register of Sensor Value ...................................................................................................... 43
3.3.4 Sensor Values ....................................................................................................................... 44
3.3.5 Example 1: Sensor Judgment (Judgment of Distance between Steps) ............................... 44

Functions 2 Electro Press JP-S


3.4 Step.............................................................................................................................................. 46
3.4.1 Drive Mode ............................................................................................................................ 47
3.4.2 Slow Down Load Rate/Stop Reference Position .................................................................. 61
3.5 Step Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 62
3.5.1 List of Setting Items for Types of Judge ................................................................................ 63
3.5.2 Specification of Judge Area .................................................................................................. 64
3.5.3 Action on Judge Result ......................................................................................................... 64
3.5.4 Sensor Types ........................................................................................................................ 66
3.5.5 Differential Sensors ............................................................................................................... 88
3.6 Step IO ......................................................................................................................................... 92
3.6.1 Step IO Timing Chart (Normal) ............................................................................................. 93
3.6.2 Step IO Timing Chart (Step Drive End Input)........................................................................ 94
3.6.3 Step IO Timing Chart (Step End Input) ................................................................................. 95
4. EXTERNAL CONTROL .................................................................................................................... 96
4.1 Control by Relay/Register (IO Memory) ...................................................................................... 96
4.1.1 Specification Method of the IO Memory.............................................................................. 100
4.1.2 Expressing Register Data ................................................................................................... 101
4.2 Special Relay/Special Register ................................................................................................. 102
4.2.1 Common Functions (1) Return to Home Position............................................................... 103
4.2.2 Common Functions (2) Errors ............................................................................................ 104
4.2.3 Common Functions (3) Mode and Calendar ...................................................................... 105
4.2.4 Program Running ................................................................................................................ 105
4.2.5 External Running ................................................................................................................. 111
4.2.6 Monitor Output Function ......................................................................................................112
4.2.7 JOG Functions .....................................................................................................................113
4.2.8 Program Setting Register.....................................................................................................114
5. DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT (DIO) ..................................................................................................... 140
5.1 Digital Input/Output (DIO)Connectors ....................................................................................... 140
5.2 Digital Input/Output (DIO)Circuit ................................................................................................ 143
5.3 Digital Input/Output (DIO)Settings ............................................................................................. 145
5.4 Digital Input/Output (DIO) Function Assignment ....................................................................... 145
6. FIELDBUS ....................................................................................................................................... 148
6.1 Fieldbus Overview ..................................................................................................................... 148
6.2 DeviceNet .................................................................................................................................. 149
6.3 PROFIBUS ................................................................................................................................ 152
6.4 CC-Link ...................................................................................................................................... 155
6.5 CC-Link (J) ................................................................................................................................. 161
7. ETHERNET ..................................................................................................................................... 165
7.1 Ethernet Overview ..................................................................................................................... 165
7.2 Ethernet Connector.................................................................................................................... 166

Functions 3 Electro Press JP-S


7.3 Communication Settings (IP Address Settings)......................................................................... 167
7.4 Communication Specifications .................................................................................................. 168
7.5 Ethernet IO (Control via Access to Relay/Register) .................................................................. 169
7.5.1 Format for Sending & Receiving Data ................................................................................ 170
7.5.2 Data Send Procedure ......................................................................................................... 171
7.5.3 Function Code..................................................................................................................... 172
7.5.4 IO Relay Read..................................................................................................................... 172
7.5.5 IO Register Read (Read Numerical Type Data) ................................................................. 174
7.5.6 IO Relay Write ..................................................................................................................... 174
7.5.7 IO Register Write (Numerical data write) ............................................................................ 176
7.5.8 Abnormal Response............................................................................................................ 176
7.5.9 Ethernet IO (Examples) ...................................................................................................... 178
7.5.10 Example of Programming Register via Ethernet IO ......................................................... 184
7.6 Result Data Transmission.......................................................................................................... 189
7.6.1 Basic Communication Text.................................................................................................. 190
7.6.2 Result Data Send Procedure .............................................................................................. 192
7.6.3 Function Code..................................................................................................................... 193
7.6.4 Quality Control Data ............................................................................................................ 194
7.6.5 Judge Type Results Format ................................................................................................ 196
7.6.6 Time-Series data ................................................................................................................. 200
7.6.7 Quality Control Data (received example) ............................................................................ 201
7.6.8 Time-Series Data (Example of receiving data) ................................................................... 204
8. RS-232C.......................................................................................................................................... 209
8.1 RS-232C Overview .................................................................................................................... 209
8.2 RS232C Connector ................................................................................................................... 209
8.3 RS232C Communication Setting (Baud Rate Setting).............................................................. 210
8.4 RS232C Communication Format .............................................................................................. 210
8.5 Control by Access to Relay/Register via RS232C......................................................................211
8.5.1 Data Send Procedure ..........................................................................................................211
8.5.2 Function Code..................................................................................................................... 212
8.5.3 IO Relay Read..................................................................................................................... 212
8.5.4 IO Register Read (Read Numerical Type Data) ................................................................. 214
8.5.5 IO Relay Write ..................................................................................................................... 216
8.5.6 Register Write (Writing Numeric Data)................................................................................ 217
9. SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................................................... 219
10. GLOSSARY................................................................................................................................... 245

Functions 4 Electro Press JP-S


FOR YOUR SAFETY

The safety notes outlined below are provided in order to ensure safe and correct usage of the product
in addition to preventing injury to the operator, other people and damage to property as well.

・・・・・Be sure to follow the safety guidelines detailed here・・・・・

Symbols are also listed alongside the safety note explanations. Please refer to the list below for an
explanation of these symbols.

 Symbols that indicate the level of danger and/or damage.


The level of danger or damage that could occur as a result of ignoring these safety guidelines and
misusing the robot are classified by the following symbols.
This symbol indicates an imminent risk of serious injury or
Danger death.

Warning This symbol indicates a risk of serious injury or death.

This symbol indicates the possibility of serious injury or damage


Caution to property.

 The following symbols list the nature of the danger and any necessary safety methods to be taken.

Indicates caution must be taken

Take Caution (General Precaution)

Indicates a forbidden action

Never do this (General Precaution)

Do not disassemble, modify or repair.

Do not touch (Contact Prohibition)

Indicates a required action

Be sure to follow instructions (General Requirement)

4 Be sure to unplug the power supply cord

Make sure the machine is grounded

Functions 5 Electro Press JP-S


FOR YOUR SAFETY

When operating the Electro Press or performing maintenance operations, place this operation manual
within reach so you can look at it any time.
However, safety measures are not limited to those outlined in the operation manuals. Perform your
own risk assessments according to the conditions in which the Electro Press will be used, and take
measures you think will be effective as a result of the assessment.

Danger

Set up a safety enclosure.


Anyone entering the operating range of the press may be injured.

Make sure to install a safety interlock.


Please make sure to install a safety interlock which cuts power when someone enters the
operating range of the press.

 Installation Example

• Install the controller within an enclosure such as a control board enclosure.


• The safety circuit should be established according to category 3/performance level D.

Functions 6 Electro Press JP-S


FOR YOUR SAFETY

Danger

When entering the safety enclosure due to something being wrong with the Electro
Press or peripheral devices, or you are performing an inspection or lubricating the
machine etc., be sure the unit is isolated from any power sources before
proceeding. Failure to do so can cause electric shock or injury.

If you do work inside the safety enclosure, perform a risk assessment and establish
"Work Regulations" that follow the items below with thorough planning for safety.
Failure to do so may cause injury.
• The work regulations must cover details of Electro Press operating procedures as
well as signs to be used between operators, and they must be appropriate for the
operation.
• When creating the work regulations, ensure that the opinions of both machine
operators and industrial health and safety specialists are included, and revise and
update the regulations regularly.

When the Electro Press power is switched ON, do not insert your fingers, face,
or any other body part inside the safety enclosure. Doing so causes injury.

When installing two or more presses at the same time, please make sure to connect
the correct controller to the correct unit. If the press and controller are not correctly
connected and the motor power is turned ON for those presses at the same time, the
rams may move. Before supplying motor power, makes sure you have the correct
unit and controller connected together.
Failure to do can cause injury.
Additionally, when supplying motor power and checking press operability, please do so
one press at a time.

Do not use the press where flammable or corrosive gas is present.


Leaked gas accumulating around the unit can cause fire or an explosion.

Functions 7 Electro Press JP-S


FOR YOUR SAFETY

Warning

When transporting the press, attach the eyebolt(s) to the press and lift it with a crane etc.
Lifting without a crane causes injury and/or unit damage.
Firmly tighten the eyebolts so they do not come loose. When lifting the press horizontally
always use two eyebolts.
Also, be careful when lifting the Electro Press as it will tilt.
When moving the press, take care that there is no excessive force applied to the sensors
on the press. Excessive force applied to the sensors can cause damage or breakdown.

 Eyebolt Types
Vertical Horizontal
JP-S0501, JP-S1001, JP-S1501, JP-S2001 M8 M6 (2 pcs.)
JP-S3001 M10 M8 (2 pcs.)
JP-S5001 M12 (2 pcs.) M12 (2 pcs.)
JP-S5R01 M12 (1 pc.) M10 (2 pcs.)
JP-S10T1, JP-S10R1, JP-S20T1 M16 M16 (2 pcs.)

• Vertical

Eyebolt

• Horizontal
Eyebolts

Sensor

Functions 8 Electro Press JP-S


FOR YOUR SAFETY

Warning

When transporting the main unit, after confirming the unit’s approximate center of gravity
with the diagrams below, use a crane to raise the unit. The center point of gravity varies
depending on the model.

Center of
重心
gravity

Center of
Center of 重心
gravity
重心
gravity

155
95 13

Center of
gravity
241

Center of Center of
gravity 重心
gravity
505

JP-S1001-150

Functions 9 Electro Press JP-S


FOR YOUR SAFETY

Warning

When transporting the main unit, after confirming the unit’s approximate center of gravity
with the diagrams below, use a crane to raise the unit. The center point of gravity varies
depending on the model.

NOTE
• Point of center of gravity for
JP-S1501 is the same as JP-S2001. Center of
gravity

Center of
gravity

Center of
Center of gravity
gravity

Center of
gravity

Functions 10 Electro Press JP-S


FOR YOUR SAFETY

Warning

When transporting the main unit, after confirming the unit’s approximate center of gravity
with the diagrams below, use a crane to raise the unit. The center point of gravity varies
depending on the model.

Center of
Center of gravity
gravity
Center of
gravity

Center of
Center of
gravity
gravity

Functions 11 Electro Press JP-S


FOR YOUR SAFETY

Warning

When transporting the main unit, after confirming the unit’s approximate center of gravity
with the diagrams below, use a crane to raise the unit. The center point of gravity varies
depending on the model.

Center of
Center of gravity
gravity
Center of
gravity

365 365
224 39 226 37

365
217 46
381

Center of
Center of 重心
403

gravity
重心
gravity
Center of
重心
gravity
353

943
893
743

JP-S5R01-200 JP-S5R01-350 JP-S5R01-400

Functions 12 Electro Press JP-S


FOR YOUR SAFETY

Warning

When transporting the main unit, after confirming the unit’s approximate center of gravity
with the diagrams below, use a crane to raise the unit. The center point of gravity varies
depending on the model.

Center of
gravity

Center of
gravity

465
290 35

465
283 42
504

Center of
重心
gravity
Center of
406

gravity
重心
1089
889

JP-S10R1-200 JP-S10R1-400

Functions 13 Electro Press JP-S


FOR YOUR SAFETY

Warning

When transporting the main unit, after confirming the unit’s approximate center of gravity
with the diagrams below, use a crane to raise the unit. The center point of gravity varies
depending on the model.

Center of
gravity
Center of
gravity
重心

NOTE
• For the center of gravity of Special Specification models, please refer to “2.4 Transporting the Press”
in Setup and Maintenance.

Functions 14 Electro Press JP-S


FOR YOUR SAFETY

Warning

Be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet when the unit is not in
use for long periods of time. Dust accumulation may cause fire.
When removing the terminal type power cord, with the breaker for the power supply
set to OFF perform a lockout and tagout, and confirm there is no electricity
flowing to the press.

In order to stop the Electro Press immediately, install an external safety circuit (a
power cut-off via an emergency stop etc.) Install this emergency stop so the
operator can easily use it (place the emergency stop switch within reach etc.)
It is dangerous if you operate the machine without the emergency stop switch within
reach as you will not be able to stop the Electro Press immediately and safely in the
event of an emergency.
NOTE: The safety circuit should be established according to the category 3/
performance level D.

Before performing a run or operation, always check the following:

• Obstacles: Check that there are no obstacles in or around the Electro Press and its
working area.
• Installation: Check that the machine is installed properly, and that there are no
abnormalities with the Electro Press and any peripheral devices.
• Emergency Stop Functions: Be sure that emergency stop is functioning properly.

Operating the Electro Press without performing these safety checks is dangerous.

Do not allow water or oil to come in contact with the Electro Press, control box,
or cables. Contact with water or oil can cause electric shock, or unit malfunction.
IP Protection Rating: IP20 for both Electro Press and control box (Not water-resistant)

Functions 15 Electro Press JP-S


FOR YOUR SAFETY

Warning

Always make sure a supply power breaker is installed at the power supply
source of the control box.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or unit malfunction.

Be sure to use the unit within its rated current range.


Failure to do so may cause fire or unit malfunction.

Use protective gear such as a helmet, protective gloves, protective goggles, and safety
shoes when installing the machine.

Be sure to turn OFF the power supply before plugging in the connection cords
and cables for the pendant unit etc.
Failure to do so can cause electric shock, loss of data, or damage to the unit.

Confirm there is no dust on the power cord and plug it into the wall outlet firmly.
A cord not plugged in properly may heat up the connector and cause a fire.
Additionally, when connecting a terminal type power cord, with the breaker for the
power supply set to OFF perform a lockout and tagout, and confirm there is no
electricity flowing to the press. Failure to do so can cause electric shock or injury.

Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the unit.


Disassembly or modification may cause electric shock or unit malfunction.

Make sure to power the unit within its rated current range.
Failure to do so may cause unit malfunction.

Make sure that the machine is grounded. Do not use the machine if it is not
grounded. Make sure that the grounding resistance for the Electro Press power
supply is 100Ω or less. Insufficient grounding can cause electric shock, fire, unit
malfunction or damage.

Functions 16 Electro Press JP-S


FOR YOUR SAFETY

Warning

When connecting the power cord, with the breakers to the power supply set to
OFF, perform a lockout and tagout, and make sure that charge lamp is OFF.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.

Do not block or cover the controller’s cooling fan.


The controller is equipped with air vents on the top and bottom. Provide at least
100mm clearance both top and bottom, and around all sides of the controller unit.
Failure to do so may cause abnormal temperature increases or malfunction.

If anything unusual occurs, such as a burning smell or unusual sound, stop


operation and turn the power OFF immediately. Contact the dealer from whom
you purchased the press or the office listed on the last page of this manual.
Continuing to use the press without addressing the problem may cause electric shock,
fire, or unit breakdown.

When exchanging the battery, always turn the power (motor power supply and
control power supply) OFF and make sure that the charge lamp of the controller
is OFF before proceeding.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or unit malfunction.

Charge Lamp Controller


Caution Label

Front Rear

Functions 17 Electro Press JP-S


FOR YOUR SAFETY

Warning
 Motor surface temperature
Operate the Electro Press within the range of motor surface temperature of less than 100
degrees Celsius.
Failure to do so can cause electric shock or unit breakdown.
To prevent the motor from overheating, cool down the motor, take longer waiting time or
shorten the loading time.
 Danger voltage terminals
The following terminals and terminal bases will be charged with electricity of AC180 – 250V.
JP-SC0501, JP-SC1001, JP-SC1001-01, JP-SC1501, connector terminals: 【MOT-U】
JP-SC2001 【ACIN】
JP-SC2001-01, JP-SC3001, JP-SC3001-11, JP-SC5001, terminal bases : 【U, V, W】
JP-SC5R01, JP-SC10T1, JP-SC10R1, JP-SC20T1 【L1, L2, L3】

Make sure that charge lamp of the controller is turned off before connecting the motor or
switching the power supply. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or breakdown of
the machine. When the power switch of the Electro Press is ON, never touch the above
connector terminals. Failure to do so may result in electrical shock.
NOTE:【MOT-U】 terminal and 【U, V, W】 terminal base will be charged with electricity
when turning on the operation power supply.

MOT-U

【L1,L2,L3】

ACIN 【U, V, W】

Functions 18 Electro Press JP-S


FOR YOUR SAFETY

Caution

Regularly replace the back-up battery in the controller.


Failure to do so may result in malfunction or unit breakdown.

Check regularly that the mounting screws are always firmly tightened (every
three months or 750 hours of use, depending on how often the Electro Press is
in use.) Loose screws may cause injury or unit breakdown.

For a long operating life, lubricate the machine once every 6 months or every 1500
hours of press ON time, whichever comes first from the last periodic check.
Failure to lubricate the machine shortens its lifespan. After lubrication, run the press
full stroke to make sure the internal parts are lubricated.

Place the machine in a well-ventilated area for the health and safety of the
operator.

Place the machine on a suitable flat surface that can support its weight.
Inadequate installation can cause the unit to fall, overturn or break down.

Use the unit in an environment between 0 and 40°C, with a humidity level of 20
to 90%, and without condensation. Use outside of these conditions may cause unit
breakdown.

Use the unit in an environment where no electrical noise is present.


Failure to do so may cause unit malfunction or breakdown.

Do not drop or jar the unit during transport and/or installation.


This could cause injuries or damage the unit.

Functions 19 Electro Press JP-S


FOR YOUR SAFETY

Caution

Use the press in an indoor environment where it is not exposed to direct


sunlight. Direct sunlight may cause malfunction or breakdown.

When attaching jigs, make sure that they are secured properly.
Failure to do so may cause an injury or unit breakdown.

Be sure to check the connections of the cords and cables to the main unit.
Improper wiring may result in unit malfunction or breakdown.

The controller should be installed inside the enclosure.


Failure to do so may cause injury or unit breakdown.

Secure at least 100mm clearance on the top, bottom and sides of the controller, and
make sure there is nothing pulling on the cords.

The installation mount should be made of steel and it should be able to support the
machine’s weight and pressing load. Failure to do so may cause injury or damage.

Do not use the Electro Press in an environment that is damp or dusty.


IP Protection Rating: IP20 for both Electro Press and control box (not water resistant)

Perform daily and periodic inspections and check to make sure there are no
abnormalities with the Electro Press or peripheral devices. Additionally, keep records of
the inspections and store them for 3 years or more so that the details can be referred to
for future inspections.

Do not damage or hit the ram at high speeds against the stopper or jig by setting the
wrong model settings.
Mistaken operations can cause injury or damage.

Functions 20 Electro Press JP-S


Response to the EC Directive
A declaration of conformity to the EC Directive is required for use in the EC zone.
This product (Electro Press, JP-S Series) is made in accordance with the following two declarations:
1. Declaration of conformity for EMCD
2. Declaration of incorporation to cover the LVD and MD
This is an embedded product and the configuration varies depending on the end-user’s machines and
devices. For this purpose, we conduct trial tests and risk assessments using a representative setup.
In accordance, we request that the end-users perform a final compatibility test and risk assessment
using their own complete setup of machines and devices to conform to the required EMCD, LVD and
MD.

Functions 21 Electro Press JP-S


1. BASIC OPERATION OVERVIEW

1.1 Return to Home Position


When executing a return to home position, the ram moves to the 0mm position (home position) at the
return to home position speed*. The encoder is also reset.
As the encoder needs to be reset once the press controller power comes ON, you always need to
perform a return to home position once. Once the return to home position is performed, “Completion of
Mechanical Initialization (Special Output Relay)” comes ON. After that, even if the motor power is cut
off, the position is tracked by the encoder.
If “Completion of Mechanical Initialization (Special Output Relay)” is OFF, a return to home position
operation is required. A return to home position operation can be performed by switching the
“Mechanical Initialization (Special Input Relay)” from OFF to ON. “During Mechanical Initialize (Special
Output Relay)” switches ON to indicate that the press is returning to the home position. Once the return
to home position is complete, “During Mechanical Initialize (Special Output Relay)” switches OFF, and
“Completion of Mechanical Installation (Special Output Relay)” switches ON.
If the return to home position is performed while “Mechanical Initialization (Special Input Relay)” is ON,
the ram moves to the 0mm position.

*Return to home position speed: Approx. 15mm/s (JP-S0501, 1001, 2001, 10T1, 10R1)
Approx. 25mm/s (JP-S3001, 5001, 5R01),
Approx. 7.5mm/s (JP-S20T1)

1.2 Move to Program Home Position (Work Home Position)


Work home positions can be set for each program. To move to the registered program home position,
turn “Go to the Program Home Position (Special Input Relay)” ON.

1.3 Program Run Overview


The operation which from preset conditions performs a series of run operations (namely, the approach,
probe, movement (multi-level), and the return) is called a “program run.” This needs to be set
beforehand using the PC software or pendant unit. With a program run, the press can judge whether
various values such as the load and/or position etc., are within the set range during a movement
(multi-level).
Refer to “3. Program Runs” for further details on program runs.

Functions 22 Electro Press JP-S


1.4 External Command Runs
The press has an “External Running” function to make movements with a specified speed and target
position, or with a specified speed and target load. This is different from a program run and does not
need to be set beforehand. However, only constant speed movements are made as this does not have
various movement modes, sensor functions, or result data output functions.

1.5 JOG Movements (Low Speed Movements During Signal Input)


Low speed movements made while an external output signal is ON are called “JOG movements.” With
a JOG movement, an inching operation is done first. An inching operation makes a movement using a
registered short distance. You can exclusively perform an inching operation by briefly outputting the
JOG command. If the JOG command is continually output, a movement is continuously made at the
preset JOG speed while the command is ON.
As this function simply lowers and raises the ram slowly, it does not have various movement modes,
sensors, result output functions that a program run does.
Also note that you cannot make a movement less than the inching settings.

1.6 External Control Overview


The Electro Press (JP-S) series can be controlled by commands from a PLC (Programmable Logic
Controller) etc. via digital input/output (DIO), field bus, or Ethernet.

There are two types of input/output (control) with a PLC:

1. Input/output (control) from a special relay/special register


Commands such as “Home Point Return Instruction” or “Start Program Running” are prepared as
special relays. These functions are pre-assigned to the physical digital input/outputs (DIO) or
fieldbus, etc. From these settings, operations such as a “Return to Home” or a “Program Run” can
be performed through the physical IO.

2. Input/output (control) from program settings


To see which step of a multi-leveled movement is being performed, you can output “Step
Execution”, output each judgment result, or output “judgment values (numerical values)” externally
via DIO, fieldbus, or Ethernet. Rather than preparing various system functions such as special
relays or special registers, “Program Settings” can be made to allow input and output from the
various places of a program execution.

Functions 23 Electro Press JP-S


Digital input/output (DIO), fieldbus and Ethernet are basically used in the same way by assigning
specific functions. However, as the amount of data that can be input/output differs, the functions that
can actually be used differ. For example, a DIO has 17 input points and 16 output points and therefore
it may not be realistic to use a DIO to obtain judgment values. It is more effective to use Ethernet or a
fieldbus to obtain judgment values.

When using a fieldbus, you can access (read and write) the relay and registers on the Electro Press
side by setting the access (read and write) in the same way as you would for access to the PLC
internal relay/register from a PLC.
With Ethernet communication, there are ports and functions for relay and register access (read and
write).

1.7 Program Run Result Output Overview


The following data are results data from a program run.

1. Quality Data
2. Time-Series Data
The content (items) to be output are predetermined and is output to the PC via Ethernet (the data
can be saved to a file with the PC software).

3. Output data from program settings


This data can be obtained with a PLC via fieldbus or Ethernet as stated in “1.6 External Control
Overview.”

Functions 24 Electro Press JP-S


2. DATA ORGANIZATION

The data required to operate the press is organized as shown below.

Model/Adjustment Data (Section 2.1)

Digital Input/Output (DIO) (Section 5.3)

Fieldbus (Section 6.1)

RS-232C (Section 8.3)

Parameters (Section 2.2)

JOG Environment (Section 2.3)

Special Relay/Special Register Assignment (Section 2.4)

Position Zone Output (Section 2.5)

Constant Load Movement Gain (Section 2.5)

Program (Section 2.7, Section 3)

Program 1

Program Data
Pressing Step 1
Drive Mode
Step sensor

Pressing Step 512

Program 512

For details on how to set data, see the PC Operation and Pendant Unit operating manuals.

Functions 25 Electro Press JP-S


2.1 Model/Adjustment Data
2.1.1 Model
This setting defines the specifications of the Electro Press. This is already set according to the
machine specifications in the factory, and does not need to be changed by the customer.

1. Model Name (Maximum Load)


Setting that decides the model (maximum load and speed)
JP-S0501-00
JP-S0501-01
JP-S1001-00
JP-S1001-01
JP-S1501-00
JP-S2001-00
JP-S2001-01
JP-S3001-00
JP-S3001-11
JP-S5001-00
JP-S5R01-00
JP-S5001-0S
JP-S10T1-00
JP-S10R1-00
JP-S20T1-00
You can select from the 15 options above. If a load that exceeds the maximum load value is detected,
“Maximum Load Error” is output. This also affects the stroke that can be selected.

2. Maximum Stroke (Length Specifications)


This is the maximum length that the ram can move. If the ram attempts to move further than this
length, “Maximum Stroke Error” is output.
The selectable stroke differs depending on the maximum load.

3. Brake Valid/Invalid
This sets whether or not to apply the brake that retains the ram when the motor power is OFF.

4. With/Without load cell


This sets whether the load cell is present. There are 3 selections available: Pressing/Pulling/Invalid.
If a load cell is equipped (pressing or pulling), the pressing load value can be obtained from the
load cell, and you can use control functions from loads such as “Stop at the setting load” or
“Constant Load”. If there is no load cell, the pressing load is completely unknown. Only operations
specified by position can be performed.

Functions 26 Electro Press JP-S


2.1.2 Adjustment Data
This is data that relates to position, load, etc., adjustments.
This chapter explains the meaning of each parameter. For details on changing the setting procedure,
see chapters 3 and 4 in the Setup and Maintenance operation manual.

1. Position Offset
Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
The offset for the position set by the
Position offset value mm
mechanical home adjustment

2. Load Offset
This sets the load offset value and update timing for the load offset.
The load offset value is reduced or added to the detected load value (calibration value)to calculate
the final load value.

Load value = Detected load value (calibration value) + load offset value

Additionally, if a load offset automatic reset is performed, a value that makes the end load value zero is
automatically registered as the load offset value.
Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Invalid: Automatic reset is not
performed

Reset at return to home position:


Invalid / Reset at Performed when the return to home
return to home position completes
position / Reset at
Load Offset Auto Reset ―
end for each shot / Reset at end for each shot:
Reset at start for Performed when the return to home
each shot position and program run are
completed

Reset at start for each shot:


Performed at start of the program run
Offset N Load offset value
Decreased Adjustment:
Subtracts the offset value from
detected load value (calibration
Decreased value) and calculates the final load
Load Offset
Adjustment Adjustment / value
Adjustment ―
direction Increased
Adjustment Increased Adjustment:
Adds the offset value to detected load
value (calibration value) and
calculates the final load value

Functions 27 Electro Press JP-S


3. Initialization sensor adjustment values/ Ram projection length
This is an adjustment value used to define the ram projection length at the home position.
Configure this setting according to the “Home position adjustment” procedure. Refer to the
operation manual Setup and Maintenance.

4. Load adjustment data


This data is used to adjust the linearity of the load cell attached to the press unit.
Use the load adjustment device as an external device, enter the press value (load value) and load
adjustment device value (adjustment value), and perform the correction.

Electro Press

Load adjustment device

Adjustment value

Adjustment value 4
Load value P4
(After adjustment)
Adjustment value 3
Adjustment value 2 P3
P2
P1
Load
Load Load Load Load Load value
value 1 value 2 value 3 value value 4

For example, if the load adjustment points are set at 4 locations, the graph would look as shown
above.
If the actual value detected during operation is between load values 3 and 4, the display load value
(load value after adjustment) is calculated based on a straight line between P3 and P4.
If a value larger than the maximum load value is detected, the straight line immediately before
(P3 to P4 in this case) is extended, and the display load value is calculated.
The more load adjustment points, the more accurate the adjustment value.
A maximum of 7 can be input.

Functions 28 Electro Press JP-S


Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
No. of load adjustment points 0, 2 – 7 ― No. of load adjustment data
Load value N
Load
Adjustment
adjustment1 N
value
...
Load value N
Load
Adjustment
adjustment7 N
value

2.2 Parameters
1. Monitor IO Update Cycle
Set the update cycle for the special register monitor output function.

Select one of the 7 settings below.


1) 50msec
2) 100msec
3) 200msec
4) 300msec
5) 400msec
6) 500msec
7) 1000msec
For details on the monitor output function, see “4.2.6 Monitor Output Function.”

2. Result Data Save Mode


Result data is made up of quality control data and time-series data.
Result data is backed up by the lithium battery and is saved for each executed program.
Select one of the 3 options below.
1) Save quality control data
2) Save quality control data and time-series data
3) Do not save result data

If result data is retrieved by communication, it is automatically deleted. Data not retrieved externally is
saved internally in the JP-S.
The result data memory capacity is 490 Kbyte. If result data is continually saved and the available
memory becomes less than 64 Kbytes, “Result Data Capacity Warning (0003)” is displayed. When the
memory is full, “Result Data Capacity Alarm (1009)” is displayed, and program runs can no longer be
executed. If you have set to save result data internally, make sure to retrieve the data before it exceeds
490 Kbytes.

Functions 29 Electro Press JP-S


3. Time-Series Data sampling intervals
You can select from the 5 sampling intervals below.
1) 5msec
2) 10msec
3) 20msec
4) 50msec
5) 100msec

4. Differential Sensor Sampling Interval


You can select the differential sensor sampling interval from the following 8 intervals:
1) 1msec
2) 2msec
3) 4msec
4) 8msec
5) 16msec
6) 32msec
7) 64msec
8) 128msec

2.3 JOG Environment Settings


The parameter settings when JOG movements are performed.

Parameter Setting Range/Selections Unit Function


JOG Speed - mm/s Speed during continuous movements
JOG Inching
- mm Unit distance during inching operations
Distance
If this value is exceeded during a JOG
Max load of JOG - N movement, “JOG maximum load
warning” is output

2.4 Special Relay/Special Register Assignment


There are commands such as “Returning to Home Position” and “Start Program” in the press internal
functions. By assigning these functions to an external control interface (Digital Input Output (DIO)/
Fieldbus etc.), it is possible to control them externally.
For details on the list of functions that can be used, refer to section “4.2 Special Relay/Special Register”
in this manual.

Functions 30 Electro Press JP-S


2.5 Position Zone Output
Position zone output is a function to output a signal when the tip of the ram is in the set position range.
Up to 32 points (sets) can be registered.

Set the following three items.


1) Output Start Position
2) Output End Position
3) Output Destination of the Position Zone

If the ram is in the range below, signal output of the position zone signal destination comes ON.

• Output start position ≦ Ram position ≦ Output end position

This signal is sent not only during movements but also during stand-by.

Note: Even if you want to output this signal for a single point, we recommended setting a different
value for “output start position” and “output end position”. If both points are set with the same
value, a signal is sent only when the ram is exactly at the set coordinates, and as a result, the
required output may not be obtained.

2.6 Constant Load Movement Gain


This is gain settings used with a constant load movement. The settings are done by %.
There are the following three gains:
1) Proportional gain
2) Integral gain
3) Differential gain

A constant load movement is controlled by PID control. Based on the target load and current load
difference (load deviation) the gain of each of the following items is used as a coefficient and the sum
of this as the control amount (movement speed):
1) Load deviation
2) Integrated value of load deviation
3) Differential of load deviation

Functions 31 Electro Press JP-S


• P-Control (basic proportional control)
This is the basic load deviation for proportional control. The larger the deviation, the more the
speed is increased. When the deviation becomes 0, speed is 0; in other words, the ram stops

• I-Control (integral control to release a constant deviation)


If only using a proportional control, in the end a calculation error (constant deviation) will remain.
Add this error (integral), and if there is still an error, the constant deviation is reduced by making
further movement controls.

• D-Control (differential control to increase variation tracking)


Control is made based on the load deviation variation (differential) to immediately respond to
changes in workpiece conditions.

The gain is a group of these 3 values. Up to 16 groups can be set for “Gain Table No. 1 – 16”. You
need to set this “Gain table number” to the step of the constant load movement mode.

2.7 Programs
For details on program runs, refer to “3. Program Runs” in this manual.

Functions 32 Electro Press JP-S


3. PROGRAM RUNS

Generally speaking, the JP-S series makes program runs according to the workflow shown below.

1. Approach Operation (Refer to “3.1.3 Approach”)


(Ram) Lowers the ram at high* speed from the work start
position
2. Probe Operation (Refer to “3.1.4 Probe”)
Lowers the ram at slow speed until contact with the
workpiece.
(1)
3. Step (Refer to “3.4 Step”)
(4) The actual pressing operation.
(2)
Multiple levels can be set for 1 program.
4. Return Operation (Refer to “3.1.5 Return”)
(3) The press moves to the specified return position at high
speed* after completing all steps.

*The speed can be changed for these.

The approach operation, probe operation, and return operation can be enabled/disabled for each
program. Also, parameters such as operating speed and stop timing for each operation are set in
program data.
For example, the diagram below shows a program run with an approach, probe, and a return with only
one step.

Program home position

Approach movement Program operation


Return movement A: Program standby
Approach end position
Probe movement B – D: Program running
Touching position
B: Approach
Pressing
movement C: Probe
Pressing end
position D: Pressing
Program operation state A B C D E A E: Return

Program sensor

Step sensor

Fixed Unfixed Fixed

Functions 33 Electro Press JP-S


NOTE: ON and OFF for program/step sensors can be read during program standby.

You can set to have the run with no probe depending on the settings. However, for normal operations
with a probe, please use a speed of less than 5mm/s. If you make settings for no probe with sections
that the “Probe” will hit the workpiece in the operation, the impact may cause breakdown.
For no load cell specifications (cannot use a probe as there is no load detecting function), or if pressing
and switching various programs with operations B – E (on the previous page), it can be assumed that
the probe is set to NO for a program after the ram has made contact, as there is no need for the
sensor.

An impact may cause damage to the ball screw, bearing, cam follower (rotation stopper), and load cell.
It may depend on the stiffness, weight of the workpiece or the constant of the spring, however, no
matter what; there is a chance of causing a large impact from making contact at high speeds.
Whenever possible, make contact with the workpiece using the sensor (a movement of less than
5mm/s).
Additionally, there are no difficulties with loads which are smoothly changed, however for changes
which are sudden, there is risk of impact. For situations such as this, reduce and use a pressing speed
less than you normally do.

You need to take special caution against impact with no load cell specifications. Because there is no
load cell, the load cell itself is not damaged by impact. However, because the pressing load cannot be
known due to a lack of a load cell, the impact load cannot be detected and stopped by the function
“Maximum Pressure Over.” For this reason, the ball screw, bearing, and cam follower (rotation
stopping) may take damage. Take extra caution to reduce the speed, and use the press so there is no
excessive pressing load.

 Sensor Function Overview (3 Types of Sensors)


A “sensor” is a function that determines whether the load, position, and other such variables are within
the specified range when a program is executed.
A sensor is broadly divided into 3 categories depending on when it is performed.

• Load Zone Sensor··············· A sensor executed from the approach during a step movement.
(Refer to “3.2 Load Zone Sensor”)

• Program Sensor ················· A sensor executed when all steps are complete.
(Refer to “3.3 Program Sensor”)

• Step Sensor ······················· A sensor executed during a step movement.


(Refer to “3.5 Step Sensor”) The range of the sensor (time, distance etc.) is specified by
parameters.

Functions 34 Electro Press JP-S


[Position]

Step 1 Step 2

Return movement

[Time]
Step sensor (1) Step sensor (2)

Load Zone Sensor

Program Sensor

For the values the sensor is based on, set the upper limit values and lower limit values.

• Lower limit value ≦ Result judge value ≦ Upper limit value: OK


• Upper limit value < Result judge value: Upper limit is NG
• Lower limit value > Result judge value: Lower limit is NG

The operation for when the judge returns a fault can be selected as either *“Invalid” or *“End program”.
Furthermore, the judge results and judge value can be output to the Relay/Register. If the judge
returned a fault, it can also be output to the relay whether the value exceeded the upper limit (upper
limit fault) or lower limit (lower limit fault).

3.1 Program Data


The data set for each program is called “Program Data”.
The following data can be set as program data for 1 program.

1. Program Name
2. Program Home Position
3. Approach
4. Probe
5. Return
6. Step

For details on the step program data, see “3.4 Step”.


For details on how to change data settings, see the “PC Operation” operating manual.

Functions 35 Electro Press JP-S


3.1.1 Program Name
”Program Name” is an identification of programs. Program name is used when programs are displayed
in a list.
“Program Name” itself does not affect any operations, and is only used only for identification.
The maximum program name size is 40 characters (single-byte fonts) (*20 characters for double-byte
fonts).

3.1.2 Program Home Position


The program home position is the position moved to when a signal (the signal assigned in the
“Program home position” function) is input from an external source or after 1 shot is completed. Unlike
the mechanical home position, the program home position can be applied for the each program.
In the following condition, the RAM moves to the “Program home position”.

• When the return operation is performed after the final step of the program is completed.
• When “Program home position” signal is sent from an external source.

However, when “Return” (refer to “3.1.5 Return”) is set to “Off”, the program ends after pressing is
complete without returning to the program home position.

Setting Range /
Parameter Unit Function
Selections
0.000 – max. stroke Coordinates of the program home
Program home position mm
length position
*The speed, acceleration and deceleration are applied from the “Return speed”, “Return acceleration”
and “Return deceleration” settings of Return parameters. Refer to “3.1.5 Return”.

3.1.3 Approach
You can enable/disable, or adjust its speed, acceleration, deceleration, begin position and the
maximum pressure during approach from the parameters.
Enable “Approach Y/N” parameter when Approach operation is necessary.
Set the “Approach Y/N” parameter to “Invalid” when Approach operation is not necessary. The Probe
operation begins immediately when the operation is started.

Functions 36 Electro Press JP-S


Setting Range /
Parameter Unit Function
Selections
Approach Y/N Valid/Invalid ― Enable/disable Approach operation
Approach speed 0.01 – max. speed mm/s Speed during approach operation
1 – max. Acceleration during approach
Approach acceleration mm/s2
acceleration operation (while accelerating)
1 – max. Acceleration during approach
Approach deceleration mm/s2
deceleration operation (while decelerating)
The coordinates that the Approach
0.000 – max. operation is completed, and the press
Begin position mm
stroke length moves to the next operation (probe or
step)
Maximum load during approach
Maximum pressure during
0 – max. load x 1.1 N If a load that exceeds this value is
approach
detected, maximum load error occurs.

3.1.4 Probe
You can enable/disable, or adjust its speed, acceleration, deceleration, touching load and the limit
position.
Enable “Probe Y/N” parameter when Probe operation is necessary.
Set the “Probe Y/N” parameter to “Invalid” when Probe operation is not necessary. The “Step”
operation begins without Probe operation.

Setting Range /
Parameter Unit Function
Selections
Probe Y/N Valid/Invalid ― Enable/disable Probe operation
Probe Speed 0.01 – 5mm/s mm/s Limit speed during the probe operation
1 – max. Acceleration during probe operation
Probe Acceleration mm/s2
acceleration (while accelerating)
1 – max. Acceleration during probe operation
Probe Deceleration mm/s2
deceleration (while decelerating)
Switching standard from Probe to Step.
When the load exceeds this value, Probe
Touching Load 0 – max. load N
operation is stopped, and the press
switches to Step operation
Limit value for the probe drive position.
When the RAM exceeds this position but
0.000 – max.
Probe Limit Position mm the touching load has not been reached
stroke length
to the Touching Load value, limit position
error occurs
Normally for operations with a probe, use with a speed of less than 5mm/s. If “Probe” is set to NO
where there are work sections that will be hit during operation, there is a possibility of malfunction from
the impact.
For specifications with no load cells (cannot use a sensor due to no load detecting function), or for
various program switchovers within one pressing operation, it can be assumed that the probe is set to
NO for a program after the ram has made contact, as there is no need for the sensor.

Functions 37 Electro Press JP-S


An impact may cause damage to the ball screw, bearing, cam follower (rotation stopping), and load
cell.

It may depend on the stiffness, weight of the work or the constant of the spring, however, no matter
what, there is a chance of causing a large impact from making contact at high speeds. Whenever
possible, make contact with work using the sensor (a drive of less than 5mm/s).

3.1.5 Return
You can enable/disable, or adjust its speed of “Return” operation.
Enable “Return Y/N” parameter when Return operation is necessary.
Set the “Probe Y/N” parameter to “Invalid” when Probe operation is not necessary. The “Step”
operation begins without Probe operation.

Set to perform return.


Set whether to use return, and other parameters such as the speed etc.
When return is set to “Off”, the program ends after pressing is complete without returning to the
program home position.

Setting Range /
Parameter Unit Function
Selections
Return On/Off Valid/Invalid ― Enable/disable return operation
0.01 – max.
Return speed mm/s Speed during the return operation
speed
1 – max. Acceleration during return operation (while
Return acceleration mm/s2
acceleration accelerating)
1 – max. Acceleration during return operation (while
Return deceleration mm/s2
deceleration decelerating)

Functions 38 Electro Press JP-S


3.2 Load Zone Sensor
Load judge is made in the required area (zone). Judge is made for the whole program and any interval
between driving steps does not affect judge.
One set load zone sensor area can be established in one program. Up to 32 zones can be set.

Approach Probed Step 1 Step 2


[Load]
Zone 32

Zone 4

Zone 3
Zone 2
Zone 1

[Position]
Load Zone Sensor Area

[Load] : Judge OK Range


Zone end position
upper limit load Upper limit fault

Zone 2
OK
Zone end position Zone 1
lower limit load
Zone start position Lower limit fault
upper limit load
Zone start position
lower limit load

[Position]
Zone start position Zone end position

Functions 39 Electro Press JP-S


 Judge timing
Load zone judge can start with the start timing.
Load zone judge ends on the following conditions:
• All the steps in the program end ························ OK judge
• Fault judge occurs during program running·········· Fault judge
(Overload occurs in any zone of the load zone sensor area.)
• Program urgent stop, emergency stop, error ········ Result up to the point when the error occurred.
4) Inside the sensor area at the point of error ···· OK judge
5) Outside the sensor area at the point of error ·· Fault judge
6) Not have reached any zone ······················· Depends on OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area

 Load Zone Judge Setting Data


• Number of judge zones ··································· 0 – 32 zones
• In case of 0 (nil) judge zone ····························· Load zone judge is invalid.
• For consecutive zones N and N+1, the end position of zone N and the start position of zone N+1
are the same.
• Judge result relay can be set.
• The judge value can be output to register (0 is output for when judge is out of range)
• Action can be selected for fault judge during program running.
1) None (continue)
2) End program

Functions 40 Electro Press JP-S


Setting List
Item Contents/Unit Range
OK/Fault when Out of Sensor OK/NG
area.
Action on Sensor Fault None (continue)
End program
Load Zone Sensor OK (OUT) Relay number
Sensor Main
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay number
Setting
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) Relay number
Load (OUT) Register number
Position (OUT) Register number
Start position mm 0.000 – max. stroke
Start position lower load mm -max. load – max.
limit load
Start position upper load N -max. load – max.
limit load
Zone1
End position mm 0.000 – max. stroke
End position lower load limit N -max. load – max.
load
End position upper load limit N -max. load – max.
load
Zone2
・・・
Zone31
Zone32

 Result (OUT)
Relay/Register (OUT)
In case of In case of When Out of Sen. Area *1
In case of OK
upper limit fault lower limit fault OK NG
OK ON OFF OFF ON OFF
Fault OFF ON ON OFF ON
Upper limit fault OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
Lower limit fault OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
2
Load (OUT)* Judge Judge Judge 0 0
2
Position* Judge Judge Judge 0 0
1
* According to the out of sensor action.
*2 The value of the first judge will be output

Functions 41 Electro Press JP-S


3.3 Program Sensor
The position and load value data are recorded, and the following sensors are operated.
• Difference (Judgment) Sensor
• Sum (Judgment) Sensor
• Value (Judgment) Sensor

Sensors can be set with up to sixteen settings for each program, and they will be executed according
to the order that you specify.
Refer to “3.6 Step IO” and “4.1 Control by Relay/Register (IO Memory)” for specifying method.

3.3.1 Register of Sensor Difference


When pressing is complete, you can take the difference between two values and execute Judgment.
The necessary settings for this sensor are listed below:

Settings Notes
Sorce1 Register Register Number
Sorce2 Register Register Number
Sensor Target Value Integer Value
Operation result OUT Register Number
Sensor (Judgment) Result (larger) OUT Relay Number
Sensor (Judgment) (larger) Action None
End Program
Sensor (Judgment) (smaller) OUT Relay Number
Sensor (Judgment) (smaller) Action None
End Program

Operation Result = Sorce1 Register – Sorce2 Register


Compare the operation result and the sensor target value and output that result as the sensor
(judgment) result.

• Calculation Result >= Sensor Target Value ·········· Sensor Result (larger)
• Calculation Result >= Sensor Target Value ·········· Sensor Result (smaller)

This sensor is used if, for example, you want to judge the difference between 2 top load values.

Functions 42 Electro Press JP-S


3.3.2 Register of Sensor Sum
When pressing is complete, you can take any two logical register sums and execute Judgment. The
necessary settings for this sensor are listed below:

Settings Notes
Sorce1 Register Register Number
Sorce2 Register Register Number
Sensor Target Value Numerical Value
Operation Result OUT Register Number
Sensor (Judgment) Result (larger) OUT Relay Number
Sensor (Judgment) (larger) Action None
End Program
Sensor (Judgment) (smaller) OUT Relay Number
Sensor (Judgment) (smaller) Action None
End Program

Operation Result=Sorce1 Register+Sorce2 Register


Compare the operation result and sensor target value and output that result as the sensor (Judgment)
result.

• Calculation Result >= Sensor Target Value ·········· Sensor Result (larger)
• Calculation Result < Sensor Target Value············ Sensor Result (smaller)

This sensor is used, if example, you want to judge the sum of 2 top load values.

3.3.3 Register of Sensor Value


When pressing is complete, you can take perform sensor Judgment for any logical register value.
The necessary settings for this sensor are listed below:

Settings Notes
Source Register Register Number
Sensor Target Value Numerical Value
Sensor (Judgment) Result (larger) OUT Relay Number
Sensor (Judgment) (larger) Action None
End Program
Sensor (Judgment) (smaller) OUT Relay Number
Sensor (Judgment) (smaller) Action None
End Program

Compare the operation result and the sensor target value and output that value as the sensor
(Judgment) result.

• Source Register Value >= Sensor Target Value ···· Sensor Result (larger)
• Source Register Value < Sensor Target Value ······ Sensor Result (smaller)

Functions 43 Electro Press JP-S


3.3.4 Sensor Values
The values handled in the register are all integer numbers and the position/load values are displayed in
the following way.

• Position
Position data is shown in longword (2W, 32bit).

Data Range: -999.999mm - 999.999mm


Binary Display: FFF0BDC1 H - 000F423F H

• Load
Load data is shown in longword (2W, 32bit)

Data Range: -200000(N) – 200000(N) (-20t – 20t)


Binary Display: FFFCF2C0 H - 00030D40 H

3.3.5 Example 1: Sensor Judgment (Judgment of Distance between Steps)


In a program consisting of three steps:

The distance from the end position of step 1 until the end position of step 3 is judged. If the distance
exceeds 1.000mm, it will be judged as an error.

Step 1 (Const Speed / Stop at the set load)


End Load: 5000N
End Position of the Step (Step IO)
Step 1 Register Number:C00 Bit Width:32
Load Hold
Step 3 (Const Speed ・ Stop at the set load)
End Load: 6000N
End Load: (StepIO)
Step 2 Register Number:C02 Bit Width:32
Load Hold
Register Difference Sensor
Source1: Register Number C02 Bit Width 32
Source2: Register Number C00 Bit Width 32
Step 3
Sensor Target Value 1000 (meaning 1.000mm)
Load Hold
Output Register Number of Calculation Result
Register Number 286 Bit Width 32
(Write operation result: source1 – source2 value)
Sensor (Judgment) result (larger) OUT: 0700
(Operation result > Sensor Value Target)

Functions 44 Electro Press JP-S


Set the register difference (Judgment) sensor for steps 1 and 3 and set the sensor target value as
1000 (1.000mm). The operation result will be stored in the register as shown below.
As the relay (0700) is ON, you can judge that the distance has exceeded 1.000mm.

Register

C00 40000

C02 41001
Sequencer

286 1001

Relay
070 ON

Operation Result
Step 1 End Position: 40.000mm (C00)
Step 3 End Position: 41.001mm (C02)
Distance Difference: 1.001mm (286)
Sensor (Judgment) Result (larger):ON (The sensor target result exceeded 1000) (0700)

Functions 45 Electro Press JP-S


3.4 Step
“Step” is the data for performing the pressing operation on the work. 512 steps can be set in one
program.
“Drive mode” is a type of ram operation (moving and stopping methods of ram) for Step. The “Drive
Mode” needs to be set individually for each step. By setting the driving mode and parameters for the
step, a diverse range of operations can be performed.

Additionally, functions such as judge and IO can be added to steps.

[Program]

[Program Data]
[Step 1]
Drive Mode: Constant speed/Stop in the set position
Parameter: Acceleration
Drive speed Step sensor

[Step 2]
Drive Mode: Constant speed/Stop at the set distance
Parameter: Acceleration
Drive speed Step sensor

Functions 46 Electro Press JP-S


3.4.1 Drive Mode
There are 9 types of drive modes as shown below.
The moving methods and stopping methods are decided based on the Drive Mode set.

Drive Modes Moving methods Stopping methods


1. Constant speed/Stop at Stop at the set position
the set position (When the set position is reached)
2. Constant speed/Stop at Stop at the set distance (Move the set distance
the set distance from the set position)
3. Constant speed/Stop at Constant Speed Stop at the set load (When the setting load is
the set load movement reached)
4. Constant speed/Stop at Stop at the set increasing load (Load is increased
the set increasing load by the set amount from the set load)
5. Constant speed/Stop
Stop on the event (set relay is turned ON from Off)
on the event
6. Constant Load/Stop Stop after the set time
after the set time (Stop after the set time)
7. Constant Load/Stop at Stop at the set position (When the set position is
the set point Control for reached)
8. Constant Load/Stop at constant load Stop at the set distance (Move the set distance
the set distance from the set position)
9. Constant Load/Stop on
Stop on the event (set relay is turned ON from Off)
the event

From the following page, the details of each mode and setting parameters are explained.
This chapter explains the meaning of each parameter. For details on how to change data settings, see
the “PC Operation” or “Teaching pendant unit operation” operating manual.

Functions 47 Electro Press JP-S


1. Constant speed/Stop at the set position
This mode maintains a constant speed, and moves the press until the specified coordinates are
reached.
(Previous step) Pressing drive Stop (Next step)

[Time]

Step Start Position

End Position

[Position] Holding Time

[Load]

Maximum
Pressure

[Time]

[Speed]

Drive speed

[Time]

Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
1 – max. Acceleration during pressing
Acceleration mm/s2
acceleration (when accelerating)
Speed 0.01 - 35mm/s mm/s Limit speed during pressing
1 – max. Acceleration during pressing
Deceleration mm/s2
deceleration (when decelerating)
Maximum Load Error occurs if the upper
Max. Pressure 0 – max. load x 1.1 N
limit of the load value is exceeded.
0.000 – max. stroke
End Position mm Position where pressing ends
length
Only the set time stops at the pressing end
Holding Time 0.0 – 999.9 sec
Position
Normal drive: After ending the step drive
(after servo motor operation), move to the
next step drive
Step end mode Normal/Connection
Connection drive: Move to the next step
drive at the timing to start decelerating for
the step

Functions 48 Electro Press JP-S


2. Constant Speed/ Stop at the set distance
This mode maintains a constant speed, and drives only for the set distance from the standard position.
The standard position is the position where the previous step was completed. If the Distance start
value is set for [Register Ref.], the standard position is not the position at which the previous stage
finished, and it can be the register value that was set for [Reg. Number of Dis. start value].
(Previous step) Pressing drive Stop (Next step)
[Time]
End position of
previous step
Pressing
distance

[Position] Holding
Time
[Load]
Maximum
Pressure

[Time]
[Speed]

Drive
speed

[Time]

Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
1 – max. Acceleration during pressing
Acceleration mm/s2
acceleration (when accelerating)
Speed 0.01 - 35mm/s mm/s Limit speed during the pressing
1 – max. Acceleration during pressing
Deceleration mm/s2
deceleration (when decelerating)
Maximum Load Error. Occurs if the upper
Maximum Pressure 0 – max. load x 1.1 N
limit of the load value is exceeded.
Pressing movement distance.
-max. stroke length
Pressing distance mm Select the starting point by the pressing
– max. stroke length
distance start value.
Only the set time stops at the pressing end
Holding Time 0.0 – 999.9 sec
position
Normal drive: After ending the step drive
(after servo motor operation), move to the
Step end mode Normal/Connection next step drive
Connection drive: Move to the next step drive
at the timing to start decelerating for the step
End Pos’n of Prev. Select the start position of the stop at the set
Distance start value
Step / Register Ref. dis. drive.
When the Distance start value is [Register
Ref.], the designated value is the starting
Reg. Number of point for pressing. For [End Pos. of Prev.
IO register number
Dis. start value Step], this value is invalid and the position at
which the previous stage finished is assumed
as the starting point.

Functions 49 Electro Press JP-S


3. Constant Speed/ Stop at the set load
This maintains a constant speed, and lowers the press until the specified load value is detected.

(Previous step) Pressing drive Stop (Next step)


[Time]

Step Start
Position
Holding
Time
Stop Reference Position
End Position
Limit Position
[Position]
[Load]
End Load

Slow Down Load Rate

[Time]
[Speed]

Drive speed

1 [mm/s]
0.2 [mm/s]
[Time]

Functions 50 Electro Press JP-S


Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
1 – max. Acceleration during the pressing
Acceleration mm/s2
acceleration (when accelerating)
Speed 0.01 - 35mm/s mm/s Limit speed during the pressing
1 – max. Acceleration during the pressing
Deceleration mm/s2
deceleration (when decelerating)
Step Drive Limit Position
0.000 – max.
Limit Position mm If the ram exceeds this position a limit
stroke length
position error occurs
Pressing ends at the same timing as this
End Load 0 – max. load N
load value is detected
When the ratio of the current load against
the end load exceeds this ratio, driving
Slow Down Load Rate 0 – 100 %
switches to slow driving. (See section
3.4.2)
If the RAM exceeds this position, driving
Stop Reference 0.000 – max.
mm switches to slow driving (see section
Position stroke length
3.4.2)
Only the set time stops at the pressing end
Holding Time 0.0 – 999.9 sec
Position
Normal drive: After ending the step drive
(after servo motor operation), move to the
next step drive
Step end mode Normal/Connection
Connection drive: Move to the next step
drive at the timing to start decelerating for
the step

With load holding, once the registered end load is detected the decent is stopped. However, it is not
stopped suddenly, and depending on the speed overrun is generated. At this time, if the work is stiff
(the ram is bumping up) the load will rise suddenly, an excessive load will be generated, and may
cause damage.
Normally, pressing speed is less than 35mm/s, and just before bumping up against the work piece,
reduce to an extremely slow speed (recommended: 0.2 mm/s). This kind of operation can be executed
by setting “Stop Ref. Pos’n”

Functions 51 Electro Press JP-S


4. Constant Speed/ Stop at the set increasing load
This mode maintains a constant speed, and performs pressing only until load of the increment load
value at end is added from the increasing load start value.
The load value at start is (by default) the previous step end load. You can set the load value not as the
previous step end value, but as the register value specified in the Reg. Number of Inc. Load Value by
setting the increasing load start value as “Register Ref.”.

(Previous step) Pressing drive Stop (Next step)

[Time]

Step Start Position


Holding
Time
Stop Reference
Position
End Position

Limit Position

[Position]

[Load]

Increment Slow Down


Load Value
at End

Load value at [Time]


start

[Speed]

Drive speed

1 [mm/s]
0.2 [mm/s]
[Time]

Functions 52 Electro Press JP-S


Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
1 – max. Acceleration during the pressing (when
Acceleration mm/s2
acceleration accelerating)
Speed 0.01 – 35mm/s mm/s Limit speed during the pressing
1 – max. Acceleration during the pressing (when
Deceleration mm/s2
deceleration decelerating)
Step Drive Limit Position
0.000 – max. stroke
Limit position mm If the ram exceeds this position a limit
length
position error occurs
When a load is detected that represents
Increment load value at an increase of this value from the load at
0 – max. load N
End the end of the previous step, pressing
ends
When the ratio of the current load against
the end load exceeds this ratio, driving
Slow down load rate 0 – 100 %
switches to slow driving. (See section
3.4.2)
If the RAM exceeds this position, driving
0.000 – max. stroke
Stop reference position mm switches to slow driving (see section
length
3.4.2)
Only the set time stops at the pressing
Holding time 0.0 – 999.9 sec
end position
Normal drive: After ending the step drive
(after servo motor operation), move to
the next step drive
Step end mode Normal/Connection
Connection drive: Move to the next step
drive at the timing to start decelerating for
the step
Increment load start End value of Prev. Select the start value of the stop at the
value Step / Register Ref. increasing load drive.
When the Increment load start value is
[Register Ref.], the designated value is
the start value for pressing.
Reg. Number of
IO register number If [End Pos. of Prev. Step] is set, the
Increment load value
value becomes invalid and the value at
which the previous stage finished is
assumed as the start value.

Functions 53 Electro Press JP-S


5. Constant Speed/ Stop on the event
This mode maintains a constant speed. Operation ends at the timing when the set relay (stop event) is
turned from OFF to ON.

[Speed]
At the timing when the set relay
(stop event) is turned from OFF
to ON, and operation ends.

Acceleration

[Position]

Stop event (set relay)

Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
1 – max. Acceleration during the pressing (when
Acceleration mm/s2
acceleration accelerating)
Speed 0.01 - 35mm/s mm/s Limit speed during the pressing
1 – max. Acceleration during the pressing (when
Deceleration mm/s2
deceleration decelerating)
Step Drive Limit Position
0.000 – max. stroke
Limit Position mm If the ram exceeds this position a limit
length
position error occurs
Load Upper Limit
Maximum Pressure 0 – max. load x 1.1 N If this value is exceeded “Maximum
Load Error” occurs.
Relay Both INPUT and OUTPUT relay can be
Stop Event 0000 – FFFF
number referred to.
Only the set time stops at the pressing
Holding Time 0.0 – 999.9 sec
end position
Normal drive: After ending the event
(after servo motor operation), move to
the next step drive
Step end mode Normal/Connection Connection drive: After ending the
event, move to the next step drive
without waiting until servo motor
completion.
 Example
By setting as “Differential occurs” of “DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.” by the stop event relay, the following
procedure can easily be done (refer to “3.5 Step Sensor”):
• Differential occurs  Drive stops  Drives the next step

To execute the procedure, the following relay numbers should be the same:
• DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.: DIF Sensor (OUT) Relay number
• Constant Speed/Stop on the event: Stop event Relay number

Functions 54 Electro Press JP-S


Settings
• DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos
DIF2 Sensor (OUT) Relay number: C000
• Constant Speed/Stop on the event
Stop event Relay number: C000

[Load]

C000 is turned ON at the timing of


differential 2 sensor (OUT)

[Position]

Relay: C00

Time

Functions 55 Electro Press JP-S


6. Const Load/Stop after the set time
This mode maintains a constant load, and moves the press until the specified time is reached.

(Previous step) Pressing drive Stop (Next step)

[Time]

Step Start Position

Limit Position
Holding
[Position] Time

[Load]

Pressing Load

[Time]
[Speed]

Maximum Speed

[Time]

Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Maximum Speed 0.01 – 35mm/s mm/s Upper limit speed during the pressing
Pressing Load 0 – max. load N Target load
Number of Gain Table 1 – 16 Number of gain table
Time of pressing drive (the time from the
Pressing Time 0.0 – 999.9 sec previous step end position to the pressing
stop)
Step Drive Limit Position
0.000 – max. stroke
Limit Position mm If the ram exceeds this position a limit
length
position error occurs
Only the set time stops at the pressing end
Holding Time 0.0 – 999.9 sec
position
Normal drive: After ending the step drive
(after servo motor operation), move to the
next step drive
Step end mode Normal/Connection
Connection drive: After ending the step
drive, move to the next step drive without
waiting until servo motor completion.

Functions 56 Electro Press JP-S


7. Constant Load/Stop at set position
This mode maintains a constant load, and moves the press until the specified coordinates are reached.
(Previous step) Pressing drive Stop (Next step)

[Time]

Step Start Position

End Position

[Position] Holding Time

[Load]

Press Load

[Time]

[Speed]

Drive Speed

[Time]

Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Maximum Speed 0.01 – 35mm/s mm/s Limit speed during the pressing
Pressing Load 0 – max. load N Target load
Number of Gain Table 1 – 16 Number of gain table
Limit Time of Pressing Drive
Maximum Pressing If this is shorter than the time to reach the
0.0 – 999.9 sec
Time pressing completion position, a “Max.
pressing time over” error occurs
0.000 – max. stroke
Limit Position mm Limit position of pressing drive
length
Only the set time stops at the pressing end
Holding Time 0.0 – 999.9 sec
position
Normal drive: After ending the step drive
(after servo motor operation), move to the
next step drive
Step end mode Normal/Connection
Connection drive: After ending the step
drive, move to the next step drive without
waiting until servo motor completion.

Functions 57 Electro Press JP-S


8. Constant Load/Stop at set distance
This mode maintains a constant load, and moves the press the specified distance.
The distance’s standard position is the previous step’s end position. You can set the standard position
not as the previous step’s end position, but as the register value specified in the Reg. Number of Dis.
Start Value by setting the distance drive start value as “Register Ref.”.

(Previous step) Pressing drive Stop (Next step)

[Time]

Step Start Position

End Position

[Position]
[Load]
Holding Time

Pressing Load

[Time]
[Speed]

Drive Speed

[Time]

Functions 58 Electro Press JP-S


Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Maximum Speed 0.01 – 35mm/s mm/s Limit speed during the pressing
Pressing Load 0 – max. load N Target load
Number of Gain Table 1 – 16 Number of gain table
Limit Time of Pressing Drive
Maximum Pressing If this is shorter than the time to reach the
0.0 – 999.9 sec
Time pressing completion position, a “Max.
pressing time over” error occurs
-max. stroke length Distance of pressing
Pressing Distance – max. stroke mm Select the starting point by the pressing
length distance start value.
Only the set time stops at the pressing end
Holding Time 0.0 – 999.9 sec
position
Normal drive: After ending the step drive
(after servo motor operation), move to the
next step drive
Step end mode Normal/Connection
Connection drive: After ending the step
drive, move to the next step drive without
waiting until servo motor completion.
Drive Distance Start End Pos’n of Prev. Select the start position of the stop at the
Value Step / Register Ref. set distance drive.
When the Distance start value is [Register
Ref.], the designated value is the starting
point for pressing.
Reg. Number of Dis.
IO register number If [End Pos. of Prev. Step] is set, the value
start value
becomes invalid and the position at which
the previous stage finished is assumed as
the starting point.

Functions 59 Electro Press JP-S


9. Constant Load/Stop on the event
This mode maintains a constant load. At the timing when the set relay (stop event) is turned from OFF
to ON, operation ends immediately.

[Load]

At the timing when the set relay


Press load
(stop event) is turned from OFF
to ON, operation ends
immediately.

[Position]

Stop event (set relay)

Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Maximum Speed 0.01 - 35mm/s mm/s Limit speed during the pressing
Pressing Load 0 – max. load N Target load
Number of Gain Table 1 – 16 Number of gain table
Limit Time of Pressing Drive
Maximum Pressing If this is shorter than the time to reach the
0.0 – 999.9 sec
Time pressing completion position, a “Max.
pressing time over” error occurs
Step Drive Limit Position
0.000 – max. stroke
Limit Position mm If the ram exceeds this position a limit
length
position error occurs
Relay Both INPUT and OUTPUT relay can be
Stop Event 0000 – FFFF
number referred to.
Only the set time stops at the pressing end
Holding Time 0.0 – 999.9 sec
position
Normal drive: After ending the step drive
(after servo motor operation), move to the
next step drive
Step end mode Normal/Connection
Connection drive: After ending the step
drive, move to the next step drive without
waiting until servo motor completion.

 Example
By setting as “Differential occurs” of “DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.” by the stop event relay, the following
procedure can easily be done (refer to “3.5 Step Sensor”):
• Differential occurs  Drive stops  Drives the next step

To execute the procedure, the relay numbers on the next page should be the same.

Functions 60 Electro Press JP-S


• DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.: DIF Sensor (OUT) Relay number
• Constant Load/Stop on the event: Stop event Relay number

Setting
• DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos
DIF2 Sensor (OUT) Relay number: C000
• Constant Load/Stop on the event
Stop event Relay number: C000

[Load]

C000 is turned ON at the


timing of differential 2 sensor
(OUT)

[Position]

Relay: C000
[Time]

3.4.2 Slow Down Load Rate/Stop Reference Position


This parameter is used in the Constant speed/Stop at the setting load and the Constant speed/Stop at
the setting increasing load mode parameter.
In order to increase the detection accuracy of the drive completion load, the drive speed is reduced
directly before the target load value is reached (Slow Down Load Rate), or directly before the position
at which the target load is due to be reached (Stop Reference Position).

At the point at which the current load ÷ drive completion load × 100 exceeds the slowdown load rate,
the drive speed decreases to 1.0mm/s.
Furthermore, at the point at which the RAM position reaches the stop reference position, the drive
speed decreases to 0.2mm/s.
[Load]
Drive completion
Load A
Slow Down = Load A X 100
Load Rate Drive
Completion
load
[Speed] Stop Reference [Position]
Position

3.0 mm/s
0.2 mm/s
[Position]

Functions 61 Electro Press JP-S


3.5 Step Sensor
The Step sensor is executed during the pressing.
A maximum of 16 Step sensors can be set for 1 step.
The following types of judge method are prepared, and the method to be used is decided from the
combination of judge target and range specification method.

Judge Target Judge Range Type of Judge


Step
RAM Position 1. Position Sensor (Start of the Step)
Start Position
Given Position 2. Load Sensor/Given position
Load
Given Distance 3. Load Sensor/Given distance
Given Position 4. Peak load Sensor/Given position
Peak Load
Given Distance 5. Peak load Sensor/Given distance
Given Position 6. Bottom load Sensor/Given position
Bottom Load
Given Distance 7. Bottom load Sensor/Given distance
Given Position 8. Top load Sensor/Given position
Top Load
Given Distance 9. Top load Sensor/Given distance
Given Position 10. Valley load Sensor/Given position
Valley Load
Given Distance 11. Valley load Sensor/Given distance
Given Position 12. Peak to peak Sensor/Given position
Peak to Peak Load
Given Distance 13. Peak to peak Sensor/Given distance
Given Position 14. DIF1 Sensor/Given Position
DIF1 Sensor
Given Distance 15. DIF1 Sensor/Given distance
Given Position 16. DIF2 Sensor/Given Position
DIF2 Sensor
Given Distance 17. DIF2 Sensor/Given distance
Step
RAM Position 18. Position Sensor (End of the Step)
End Position

Functions 62 Electro Press JP-S


3.5.1 List of Setting Items for Types of Judge

Position Sensor (Start of the Step)

Load judge/Given position

Load judge/Given distance

Peak load judge/Given position

Peak load judge/Given distance

Bottom load judge/Given position

Bottom load judge/Given distance

Top load judge/Given position

Top load judge/Given distance

Valley load judge/Given position

Valley load judge/Given distance

Peak to peak load judge/Given position


distance
Peak to peak load judge/Given
DIF1 Sensor/Given dis.

DIF1 Sensor/Given dis.

DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.

DIF2 Sensor/Given dis.

Position Sensor (End of the Step)


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Given Distance
1 - - O - O - O - O - O - O - O - O -
Origin
Judge
beginning
2 - O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O -
position/Distanc
e
Judge end
3 position/Distanc - O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O -
e
4 Slant value - - - - - - - - - - - - - O O O O -

Upper limit
5 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
value
Upper limit
6 - O O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
value at end
Lower limit
7 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
value
Lower limit
8 - O O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
value at end
Action on Judge
9 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Fault
Action on no
10 - - - - - - - O O O O - - O O O O -
judge value
OK / Fault when
11 out of sensor - O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O -
area
Sensor OK
12 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
(OUT)
Sensor Fault
13 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
(OK)
Sensor Fault of
14 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Upper (OUT)
Sensor Fault of
15 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Lower (OUT)

16 Load (OUT) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

Output of the
17 O O O O O O O O O O O - - O O O O O
position (OUT)

18 Relay (OUT) - - - - - - - O O O O - - O O O O -

Functions 63 Electro Press JP-S


3.5.2 Specification of Judge Area
There are two methods for specifying the judge area, *“Given Position” and “Given Distance”.
The *“Given Position” method specifies the area start/end positions as numerical values with the
mechanical home point as 0.
The *“Given Distance” method specifies the position that will be the origin, and sets the distance to the
starting position and end position from that point. The position of the origin can be selected from the
“End position of previous step” and “Register number” (under development).
When “Register number” is selected and register is specified, the values stored in the register are
taken as the distance origin (under development).

Given Distance/ End position of Given Distance/Register Origin


previous step origin (under development)

:Judge Range :Judge Range


[Load] [Load]

Judge distance [Position] Judge distance [Position]

Judge end distance Judge end distance

Pressing end
End position of Pressing end
position Register End position of position
previous step
value previous step

3.5.3 Action on Judge Result


The action after the judge results are output can be set in the parameters.
The following details can be set.

1. Action on Judge Fault


Sets what type of action to perform when a judge fault occurs.
Select from *“Invalid”/“End program”.
When *“Invalid” is selected, drive is continued.
When *“End program” is selected, the program is ended at that point.

Functions 64 Electro Press JP-S


2. OK/Fault When Out of Judge Area
“Out of judge area” occurs when the drive finishes before the RAM position enters into the judge area.
Specify in the parameters whether this situation is OK or NG.
If “OK” is set, the relay specified for judge OK output when the judge is OK switches ON.
If “NG” is set, the “Action on judge fault” for the judge fault is executed, and the relay specified for judge
fault output switches ON. Furthermore, neither of the judge upper limit fault output or judge lower limit
fault output switches ON.

Driving
[Time]
d

Judge start position


Judge Range
Judge end position

[Position]

3. No Judge Value OK/NG


If the load change does not fulfill the stipulated conditions for the top load or valley load judge, the
judge values do not occur. In the case of the top load for example, unless a situation such as “load
shifts from raise to lower” occurs, the judge itself cannot be executed.
Specify in the parameters whether it is *“OK”/“NG” to exit pressing when judge values do not occur in
such cases.
If “OK” is set, the relay specified for judge OK output when the judge is OK switches ON.
If “NG” is set, the “Action on judge fault” for the judge fault is executed, and the relay specified for judge
fault output switches ON. However, both the judge upper limit fault output and judge lower limit fault
output remain OFF.

Example of when the Top Load/Valley Load do not exist

[Load]

Upper limit
load

Lower limit
load
[Position]
Sensor start Sensor end
position position

Functions 65 Electro Press JP-S


3.5.4 Sensor Types
This chapter explains the meaning of each parameter. For details on how to change data settings, see
the “PC Operation” “Pendant Unit Operation” operating manual.

1. Position Judge (Start of step)


Judge the RAM position when pressing is switched from the prior step.

Step Start Position [Time]

Judge value

Lower limit position


Lower limit value
is NG
Upper limit position
OK

[Position] Upper limit is NG

Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Lower limit value of judge value
0.000 – max.
Lower limit position mm range. Judge lower limit fault if the
stroke length
judge value is lower than this value
Upper limit value of judge value
0.000 – max.
Upper limit position mm range. Judge upper limit fault if the
stroke length
judge value exceeds this value
Invalid/End Operation when judge result was
Action on Judge Fault ―
program “fault”
Judge OK Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
Output destination judge is OK
Judge Fault Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
Output destination judge is Fault
If the judge value exceeds the upper
Judge upper limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number limit load and is a fault, the specified
Output destination
relay switches ON
If the judge value is below the lower
Judge lower limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number limit load and is a fault, the specified
Output destination
relay switches ON
Register
Judge load value 000 – FFF Judge value is written to the
number
Output destination specified register
1 – 32 Data width
Register RAM position when the judge was
Judge position Output 000 – FFF
number executed is written to the specified
value
1 – 32 Data width register

Functions 66 Electro Press JP-S


2. Load judge/Given position
Load judge is performed during the time that the RAM coordinates arrive at the “Judge start position”
until reaching the “Judge end position”.
For this judge, both upper and lower limit loads are set for the start and end. The load range for the
intermediate position changes as shown in the diagram below.
[Load]
Judge OK area
Upper limit load when
judge ends
Upper limit is NG

OK

Lower limit load when


judge ends
Lower limit
value is NG
Upper limit load when
judge starts

Lower limit load when


judge starts

Judge start position Judge end position [Position]


NOTE
• The judge value is the load value at the point when a judge fault occurs.

Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
0.000 – max.
Judge start position mm Coordinates at which judge starts
stroke length
Lower limit value for the judge
Judge start position -max. load – max.
N value range at the judge start
Lower limit load load
position
Upper limit value for the judge
Judge start position -max. load – max.
N value range at the judge start
Upper limit load load
position
0.000 – max.
Judge end position mm Coordinates at which judge ends
stroke length
Lower limit value for the judge
Judge end position -max. load – max.
N value range at the judge end
Lower limit load load
position
Upper limit value for the judge
Judge end position -max. load – max.
N value range at the judge end
Upper limit load load
position
Judge result when pressing is
OK/Fault when
OK/NG ― ended without arriving at the judge
Out of Judge Area
start position
Invalid/End Operation when judge result was
Action on Judge Fault ―
program “fault”
Judge OK Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
Output destination judge is OK
Judge fault Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
Output destination judge is fault

Functions 67 Electro Press JP-S


Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
If the judge value exceeds the
Judge load value
0000 – FFFF Relay number upper limit load and is a fault, the
Output destination
specified relay switches ON
If the judge value is below the
Judge lower limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number lower limit load and is a fault, the
Output destination
specified relay switches ON
Register
Judge load value 000 – FFF Judge value is written to the
number
Output destination specified register
1 – 32 Data width
Register RAM position when NG was
000 – FFF
number occurred is written to the specified
Judge position Output
register
destination
1 – 32 Data width The position when the judge ends
is written

3. Load judge/Given distance


Load judge is performed from the judge start position to the judge end position.
For details on the calculation method for the judge start position and end position, refer to “3.5.2.
Specification of Judge Area.”
For this judge, both upper and lower limit loads are set for the start and end. The load range for the
intermediate position changes as shown in the diagram below.
[Load]
: Judge OK area

Upper limit load when


judge ends
Upper limit value is Fault

OK

Lower limit load when


judge ends

Lower limit value


Upper limit load when is Fault
judge starts

Lower limit load when


judge starts

Judge beginning distance [Position]


Judge end distance

Distance Origin
NOTE
• The judge value is the load value at the point when a judge fault occurs.

Functions 68 Electro Press JP-S


Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Reference position for judge
Distance Origin
Step Start Position ― start distance/judge end
Selection
distance
Judge beginning -max. stroke length Position of judge start (distance
mm
distance – max. stroke length from distance origin)
Judge beginning Lower limit value for the judge
-max. load – max.
distance lower limit N value range at the judge start
load
load position
Judge beginning Upper limit value for the judge
-max. load – max.
distance upper limit N value range at the judge start
load
load position
0.000 – max. stroke Position of judge end (distance
Judge end distance mm
length from distance origin)
Lower limit value for the judge
Judge end distance -max. load – max.
N value range at the judge end
lower limit load load
position
Upper limit value for the judge
Judge end distance -max. load – max.
N value range at the judge end
upper limit load load
position
Judge result when pressing is
OK/Fault when
OK/Fault ― ended without arriving at the
Out of Judge Area
judge start position
Action on Judge Invalid/End of Operation when judge result

Fault program was “fault”
Judge OK output Specified relay switches ON
0000 – FFFF Relay Number
destination when judge is OK
Judge Fault output Specified relay switches ON
0000 – FFFF Relay Number
destination when judge is Fault
Judge upper limit If the judge value exceeds the
Fault output 0000 – FFFF Relay Number upper limit load and is a fault,
destination the specified relay switches ON
Judge lower limit If the judge value below the
Fault output 0000 – FFFF Relay Number lower limit load and is a fault,
destination the specified relay switches ON
Judge load value 000 – FFF Register Number Judge value is written to the
output destination 1 – 32 Data width specified register
000 – FFF Register Number RAM position when the judge
Judge RAM position
was executed is written to the
output destination 1 – 32 Data width
specified register

Functions 69 Electro Press JP-S


4. Peak load judge/Given position
The peak load (maximum load within the range) is sampled between the points when the RAM
coordinates reach the “Sampling start position” to reaching the “Sampling end position”.

[Load]

Peak
Upper limit load

Peak load value

Lower limit load

[Position]
Sampling Start Peak load Sampling End
Position Position Position

Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Sampling 0.000 – max. Coordinates at which load sampling
mm
Start Position stroke length is started
Sampling 0.000 – max. Coordinates at which load sampling
mm
End position stroke length is ended
Lower limit value of judge value
-max load – max.
Peak lower limit load N range. Judge lower limit fault if the
load
judge value falls below this value
Upper limit value of judge value
-max load – max.
Peak upper limit load N range. Judge upper limit fault if the
load
judge value exceeds this value
Judge result when pressing is
OK/Fault when Out of
OK/Fault ― ended without arriving at the judge
Judge Area
start position
Invalid/End Operation when judge result was
Action on Judge Fault ―
program “fault”
Judge OK Output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is OK
Judge fault Output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is fault
If the judge value exceeds the
Judge upper limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number upper limit load and is a fault, the
Output destination
specified relay switches ON
If the judge value is below the lower
Judge lower limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number limit load and is a fault, the specified
Output destination
relay switches ON
Peak load value 000 – FFF Register number Peak load value is written to the
Output destination 1 – 32 Data width specified register
000 – FFF Register number Ram position when the time peak
Peak load position
load value is reached is written to
Output destination 1 – 32 Data width
the specified register

Functions 70 Electro Press JP-S


5. Peak load judge/Given distance
The peak load (maximum load within the range) is sampled between the sampling start position to the
end position, and judge is executed. For details on the calculation method for the judge start position
and end position, refer to “3.5.2. Specification of Judge Area.”
[Load]
Peak
Upper limit load
Peak load value

Lower limit load

Sampling start distance Peak load position [Position]


Sampling end distance

Distance Origin
Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Distance Origin Reference position for judge start
Step Start Position ―
Selection distance/judge end distance
Sampling Start -max. stroke length Position where sampling is started
mm
distance – max. stroke length (Distance from distance origin)
Sampling End -max stroke length – Position where sampling is ended
mm
distance max. stroke length (Distance from distance origin)
Lower limit value of judge value
Peak lower limit -max. load – max.
N range. Judge lower limit fault if the
load load
judge value falls below this value
Upper limit value of judge value
Peak upper limit -max. load – max.
N range. Judge upper limit fault if the
load load
judge value exceeds this value
Judge result when pressing is
OK/Fault when Out
OK/Fault ― ended without arriving at the judge
of Judge Area
start position
Action on Judge Operation when judge result was
Invalid/End program ―
Fault “fault”
Judge OK Output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is OK
Judge fault Output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is fault
Judge upper limit If the judge value exceeds the
fault Output 0000 – FFFF Relay number upper limit load and is a fault, the
destination specified relay switches ON
Judge lower limit If the judge value is below the lower
fault Output 0000 – FFFF Relay number limit load and is a fault, the
destination specified relay switches ON
Peak load value 000 – FFF Register number Peak load value is written to the
Output destination 1 – 32 Data width specified register
000 – FFF Register number The RAM position when the peak
Peak load position
load value is reached is written to
Output destination 1 – 32 Data width
the specified register

Functions 71 Electro Press JP-S


6. Bottom load Judgment/Given position
The bottom load (minimum load within the range) is sampled between the sampling start position to
the sampling end position, and Judgment is executed.
[Load]

Upper limit load

Bottom

Bottom load value


Lower limit load

[Position]
Sampling Start Bottom load Sampling End
Position position position

Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Sampling Start 0.000 – max. Coordinates at which load sampling
mm
Position stroke length is started
0.000 – max. Coordinates at which load sampling
Sampling End position mm
stroke length is ended
Lower limit value of judge value
-max load – max. range
Bottom lower limit load N
load Judge lower limit fault if the judge
value falls below this value
Upper limit value of judge value
-max load – max. range
Bottom upper limit load N
load Judge upper limit fault if the judge
value exceeds this value
Judge result when pressing is
OK/Fault when Out of
OK/Fault ― ended without arriving at the judge
Judge Area
start position
Invalid/End Operation when judge result was
Action on Judge Fault ―
Program “fault”
Judge OK Output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is OK
Judge fault Output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is fault
If the judge value exceeds the
Judge upper limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number upper limit load and is a fault, the
Output destination
specified relay switches ON
If the judge value is below the lower
Judge lower limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number limit load and is a fault, the
Output destination
specified relay switches ON
Bottom load value 000 – FFF Register number Bottom load value is written to the
Output destination 1 – 32 Data width specified register
000 – FFF Register number Ram position when the bottom load
Bottom load position
value is reached is written to the
Output destination 1 – 32 Data width
specified register

Functions 72 Electro Press JP-S


7. Bottom load judge/Given distance
The bottom load (minimum load within the range) is sampled between the sampling start position to
the end position, and judge is executed. For details on the calculation method for the judge start
position and end position, refer to “3.5.2. Specification of Judge Area.”
[Load]

Upper limit load


Bottom

Bottom load value

Lower limit load

Sampling start Bottom load position [Position]


Sampling end distance
Distance Origin

Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Distance Origin Reference position for judge start
Step Start Position ―
Selection distance/judge end distance
Sampling Start -max. stroke length Position where sampling is started
mm
distance – max. stroke length (Distance from distance origin)
Sampling End -max. stroke length Position where sampling is ended
mm
distance – max. stroke length (Distance from distance origin)
Lower limit value of judge value
Bottom lower limit -max. load – max.
N range. Judge lower limit fault if the
load load
judge value is below the lower limit
Upper limit value of judge value
Bottom upper limit -max. load – max.
N range. Judge upper limit fault if the
load load
judge value exceeds this value
Judge result when pressing is
OK/Fault when Out
OK/Fault ― ended without arriving at the judge
of Judge Area
start position
Action on Judge Operation when judge result was
Invalid/End program ―
Fault “fault”
Judge OK Output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is OK
Judge fault Output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is fault
Judge upper limit If the judge value exceeds the
fault Output 0000 – FFFF Relay number upper limit load and is a fault, the
destination specified relay switches ON
Judge lower limit If the judge value is below the lower
fault Output 0000 – FFFF Relay number limit load and is a fault, the
destination specified relay switches ON
Bottom load value 000 – FFF Register number Bottom load value is written to the
Output destination 1 – 32 Data width specified register
Bottom load 000 – FFF Register number The RAM position when the bottom
position Output load value is reached is written to
1 – 32 Data width
destination the specified register

Functions 73 Electro Press JP-S


8. Top load judge/Given position
The top load (load value of the section that was first shifted from increase to decrease within the range)
is sampled between the points when the RAM coordinates reach the *“Sampling start position” to
reaching the *“Sampling end position”.
[Load]

Upper limit load


Top

Top load
value

Lower limit
load

Sampling Top load position Sampling [Position]


Start Position End position
Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Sampling Start 0.000 – max. Coordinates at which load sampling is
mm
Position stroke length started
Sampling End 0.000 – max. Coordinates at which load sampling is
mm
position stroke length ended
Lower limit value of judge value range.
Top lower limit -max. load – max.
N Judge lower limit fault if the judge value falls
load load
below the lower limit
Upper limit value of judge value range.
Top upper limit -max. load – max.
N Judge upper limit fault if the judge value
load load
exceeds this value
OK/Fault on No Operation when top load did not occur
OK/Fault ―
Top during sampling
OK/Fault when Judge result when pressing is ended
OK/Fault ―
Out of Judge Area without arriving at the judge start position
Action on Judge Invalid/End
― Operation when judge result was “fault”
Fault program
Judge OK Output Relay Specified relay switches ON when judge is
0000 – FFFF
destination number OK
Judge Fault Relay Specified relay switches ON when judge is
0000 – FFFF
Output destination number fault
Judge upper limit If the judge value exceeds the upper limit
Relay
fault Output 0000 – FFFF load and is a fault, the specified relay
number
destination switches ON
Judge lower limit If the judge value is below the lower limit
Relay
fault Output 0000 – FFFF load and is a fault, the specified relay
number
destination switches ON
Top load value 000 – FFF Register no. Top load value is written to the specified
output destination 1 – 32 Data width register
Register
Top load value 000 – FFF The ram position when the top load value is
number
output destination reached is written to the specified register.
1 – 32 Data width
Top load position Relay The relay is ON when the top load is
0000 – FFFF
output destination number reached.

Functions 74 Electro Press JP-S


9. Top load judge/Given distance
The top load (load value of the section that was first shifted from increase to decrease within the range)
is sampled between the sampling start position and end position, and judge is executed.
For details on the calculation method for the judge start position and end position, refer to “3.5.2.
Specification of Judge Area.”
[Load]

Upper limit load


Top

Top limit load

Lower limit load

Top load position


Sampling start distance [Position]
Sampling end

Distance Origin
Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Distance Origin Reference position for judge start
Step Start Position ―
Selection distance/judge end distance
Sampling Start -max. stroke length Position where sampling is started
mm
distance – max. stroke length (Distance from distance origin))
Sampling End -max. stroke length Position where sampling is ended
mm
distance – max. stroke length (Distance from distance origin)
Lower limit value of judge value
-max. load – max. range
Top lower limit load N
load Judge lower limit fault if the judge
value falls below the lower limit
Upper limit value of judge value
-max. load – max.
Top upper limit load N range Judge upper limit fault if the
load
judge value exceeds this value
Operation when top load did not
OK/Fault on No Top OK/Fault ― occur
during sampling
Judge result when pressing is ended
OK/Fault when out of
OK/Fault ― without arriving at the judge start
Judge Area
position
Operation when judge result was
Action on Judge Fault Invalid/End program ―
“fault”
Judge OK Output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is OK
Judge fault Output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is fault
Judge upper limit If the judge value exceeds the upper
fault output 0000 – FFFF Relay number limit load and is a fault, the specified
destination relay switches ON

Functions 75 Electro Press JP-S


Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
If the judge value is below the lower
Judge lower limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number limit load and is a fault, the specified
output destination
relay switches ON
Register Top load value is written to the
Top load value output 000-FFF
number specified
destination
1-32 Data width register
Register The RAM position when the top load
Top load value 000-FFF
number value occurs is written to the
Output destination
1-32 Data width specified register
Top load occur output When the top load value occurs is
0000-FFFF Relay number
destination written to the register

10. Valley load judge/Given position


The valley load (load value of the section that was first shifted from decrease to increase within the
range) is sampled between the sampling start position and end position, and judge is executed.
[Load]

Upper limit load

Valley

Valley load value


Lower limit load

[Position]
Sampling Start Valley load Sampling End
Position position position
Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Sampling Start 0.000 – max. Coordinates at which load sampling
mm
Position stroke length is started
0.000 – max. Coordinates at which load sampling
Sampling End position mm
stroke length is ended
Lower limit value of judge value
-max. load – range
Valley lower limit load N
max. load Judge lower limit fault if the judge
value is below the lower limit value
Upper limit value of judge value
-max. load – range
Valley upper limit load N
max. load Judge upper limit fault if the judge
value exceeds the upper limit value
Operation when valley load did not
OK/Fault on No Valley OK/Fault ―
occur during sampling
Judge result when pressing is
OK/Fault when Out of
OK/Fault ― ended without arriving at the judge
Judge Area
start position
Invalid/End Operation when judge result was
Action on Judge Fault ―
program “fault”

Functions 76 Electro Press JP-S


Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Judge OK Output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is OK
Judge fault Output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is fault
If the judge value exceeds the
Judge upper limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number upper limit load and is a fault, the
Output destination
specified relay switches ON
If the judge value is below the lower
Judge lower limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number limit load and is a fault, the
Output destination
specified relay switches ON
Valley load value 000 – FFF Register number Valley load value is written to the
Output destination 1 – 32 Data width specified register
Valley load position 000 – FFF Register number Valley load value is written to the
Output destination 1 – 32 Data width specified register
Valley load occurred If the valley load occurred, the
0000 – FFFF Relay number
Output destination specified relay switches ON

11. Valley load judge/Given distance


The valley load (load value of the section that was first shifted from decrease to increase within the
range) is sampled between the sampling start position and end position, and judge is executed.
For details on the calculation method for the judge start position and end position, refer to “3.5.2.
Specification of Judge Area.”

[Load]

Upper limit load Valley

Valley load value

Lower limit load

Sampling start distance Valley load position [Position]


Sampling end distance
Distance Origin

Functions 77 Electro Press JP-S


Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Distance Origin Step Start Reference position for judge start

Selection Position distance/judge end distance
-max. stroke
Sampling Start Position where sampling is started
length – max. mm
distance (Distance from distance origin)
stroke length
-max. stroke
Sampling End Position where sampling is ended
length – max. mm
distance (Distance from distance origin)
stroke length
Lower limit value of judge value
-max. load – range
Valley lower limit load N
max. load Judge lower limit fault if the judge
value is below the lower limit value
Upper limit value of judge value
-max load – max. range
Valley upper limit load N
load Judge upper limit fault if the judge
value exceeds the upper limit value
Operation when valley load did not
OK/Fault on No Valley OK/Fault ―
occur during sampling
Judge result when pressing is
OK/Fault when Out of
OK/Fault ― ended without arriving at the judge
Judge Area
start position
Invalid/End Operation when judge result was
Action on Judge Fault ―
program “fault”
Judge OK Output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is OK
Judge fault Output Operation when judge result was
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination “fault”
If the judge value exceeds the
Judge upper limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number upper limit load and is a fault, the
Output destination
specified relay switches ON
If the judge value is below the lower
Judge lower limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number limit load and is a fault, the
Output destination
specified relay switches ON
Valley load value 000 – FFF Register number Valley load value is written to the
output destination 1 – 32 Data width specified register
000 – FFF Register number The RAM position when the valley
Valley load position
load value occurs is written to the
output destination 1 – 32 Data width
specified register
Valley load occurred If the valley load occurred, the
0000 – FFFF Relay number
output destination specified relay switches ON

Functions 78 Electro Press JP-S


12. Peak to peak load judge/Given position
The peak to peak load (value of the maximum load value minus the minimum load value within the
range) is sampled between the sampling start position to the end position, and the judge is executed.
[Load] [Peak to peak
load value]

Upper limit load*

Peak to peak
load value

Lower limit load*

Sampling start position Sampling end position [Position] [Sampling end position]

*These are settings to see whether or not the size of the peak to peak load values (above) exceed the
upper limit load/fall below the lower limit load (above to the right).
Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
0.000 – max. Coordinates at which load sampling
Sampling start position mm
stroke length is started
0.000 – max. Coordinates at which load sampling
Sampling end position mm
stroke length is ended
Lower limit value of judge value
Peak to peak lower -max. load – range Judge lower limit fault if the
N
limit load max. load judge value is below the lower limit
value
Upper limit value of judge value
Peak to peak upper -max. load – range Judge upper limit fault if the
N
limit load max. load judge value exceeds the upper limit
value
Judge result when pressing is
OK/Fault when Out of
OK/Fault ― ended without arriving at the judge
judge Area
start position
Invalid/End Operation when judge result was
Action on Judge Fault ―
program “fault”
Judge OK output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is OK
Judge fault output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is fault
If the judge value exceeds the upper
Judge upper limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number limit load and is a fault, the specified
output destination
relay switches ON
If the judge value is below the lower
Judge lower limit fault limit
0000 – FFFF Relay number
Output destination load and is a fault, the specified
relay switches ON
Peak to Peak load Register
000 – FFF Peak to peak load value is written to
value output number
the specified register
destination 1 – 32 Data width

Functions 79 Electro Press JP-S


13. Peak to peak load judge/Given distance
The peak to peak load (value of the maximum load value minus the minimum load value within the
range) is sampled between the sampling start position to the end position, and the judge is executed.
For details on the calculation method for the judge start position and end position, refer to “3.5.2.
Specification of Judge Area.” [Peak to peak
load value]
[Load]
Upper limit load*

Peak to
peak load
value

Lower limit load*

Sampling start distance [Sampling end


[Position]
Sampling end distance distance]
Distance Origin
*These are settings to see whether or not the size of the peak to peak load values (above) exceed the
upper limit load/fall below the lower limit load (above to the right).
Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Distance Origin Reference position for judge start
Step start position ―
Selection distance/judge end distance
Sampling Start -max. stroke length Position where sampling is started
mm
distance – max. stroke length (Distance from distance origin)
Sampling End -max. stroke length Position where sampling is ended
mm
distance – max. stroke length (Distance from distance origin)
Lower limit value of judge value range
Peak to peak -max. load – max.
N Judge lower limit fault if the judge value is
lower limit load load
below the lower limit value
Upper limit value of judge value range
Peak to peak -max. load – max.
N Judge upper limit fault if the judge value
upper limit load load
exceeds the upper limit value
Judge result when operation was
OK/Fault when
OK/Fault ― completed without the RAM reaching the
out of Judge Area
sampling start position
Action on judge
Invalid/End program ― Operation when judge result was “fault”
fault
Judge OK output Specified relay switches ON when judge
0000 – FFFF Relay no.
destination is OK
Judge Fault Specified relay switches ON when judge
0000 – FFFF Relay no.
output destination is fault
Judge upper limit If the judge value exceeds the upper limit
fault output 0000 – FFFF Relay no. load and is a fault, the specified relay
destination switches ON
Judge lower limit If the judge value is below the lower limit
fault output 0000 – FFFF Relay no. load and is a fault, the specified relay
destination switches ON
Peak to peak load 000 – FFF Register no. Peak to peak load value is written to the
value output dest. 1 – 32 Data width specified register

Functions 80 Electro Press JP-S


14. DIF1 Sensor/Given Pos.
DIF1 Sensor is done between the Sensor Begin Pos. and the Sensor End Pos. during executing the
step. [Load]

Upper limit load of DIF1

Load increased (N)/time (s)


Load of DIF1

Lower limit load of DIF1

Tim
DIF1 position
Position
Sampling start position Sampling end position

Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Sampling Start 0.000 – max. Position at which load sampling is
mm
position stroke length started
0.000 – max. Position at which load sampling is
Sampling End position mm
stroke length ended
Lower limit value of judge value
range
Lower limit load of -max. load – max.
N Judge lower limit fault if the DIF 1
DIF1 stroke length
judge value is below the lower limit
value
Upper limit value of judge value
Upper limit load of -max. load – max. range. Judge upper limit fault if the
N
DIF1 stroke length DIF 1 judge value exceeds the
upper limit value
Ram Lower Limit Sensor: if the load
increment amount (N/s) per unit of
time exceeds this value, this is
deemed that DIF 1 occurred (enter
positive numbers into the slant
value).
Slant Value -999999 – 999999 N/s
Ram Upper Limit Sensor: if the load
increment amount (N/s) per unit of
time falls below this value, this is
deemed that DIF 1 occurred (enter
negative numbers into the slant
value).
Invalid/End
Action on no DIF ― DIF1 did not occur during sampling
program
Judge result when pressing is ended
OK/Fault when out of
OK/Fault ― without arriving at the judge start
Judge Area
position
Invalid/End Operation when judge result was
Action on judge Fault ―
program “fault”

Functions 81 Electro Press JP-S


Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Judge OK output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is OK
Judge Fault output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is fault
If the judge value exceeds the upper
Judge upper limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number limit load and is a fault, the specified
output destination
relay switches ON
If the judge value is below the lower
Judge lower limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number limit load and is a fault, the specified
output destination
relay switches ON
Register
DIF1 load value output 000 – FFF Load value when judge is executed
number
destination is written to the specified register
1 – 32 Data width
Register
DIF1 position output 000 – FFF RAM position when DIF 1 occurs is
number
destination written to the specified register
1 – 32 Data width
DIF1 relay output When DIF 1 occurs, the relay
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination switches ON.

15. DIF1 Sensor/Given dis.


DIF1 Sensor is done between the Sensor Begin Pos. and the Sensor End Pos. during executing the
section. The distance origin is the step start position.

[Load]

Upper Lim. Load of DIF1

Load increased (N)/time (s)


Load of DIF1

Lower Lim. Load of DIF1

[Time]
DIF1 position
[Position]
Sampling start position Sampling end position

Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Distance Origin Reference position for judge start
Step Start Position ―
Selection distance/judge end distance
Sampling Start -max stroke length – Position at which load sampling is
mm
Position max. stroke length started (from the distance origin)
-max. stroke length – Position at which load sampling is
Sampling End position mm
max. stroke length ended (from the distance origin)

Functions 82 Electro Press JP-S


Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Lower limit value of judge value
range
Lower Lim. Load of -max. load – max.
N Judge lower limit fault if the DIF 1
DIF1 load
judge value is below the lower limit
value
Upper limit value of judge value
Upper Lim. Load of -max. load – max. range
N
DIF1 load Judge upper limit fault if the DIF 1
judge value exceeds this value
Ram Lower Limit Sensor: if the load
increment amount (N/s) per unit of
time exceeds this value, this is
deemed that DIF 1 occurred (enter
positive numbers into the slant
value).
Slant Value -999999 - 999999 N/s
Ram Upper Limit Sensor: if the load
increment amount (N/s) per unit of
time falls below this value, this is
deemed that DIF 1 occurred (enter
negative numbers into the slant
value).
Action on no DIF Invalid/End program ― DIF1 did not occur during sampling
Judge result when pressing is
OK/Fault when out of ended
OK/Fault ―
judge area without arriving at the judge start
position
Operation when judge result was
Action on judge fault Invalid/End program ―
“fault”
Judge OK output Relay Specified relay switches ON when
0000-FFFF
destination number judge is OK
Judge fault output Relay Specified relay switches ON when
0000-FFFF
destination number judge is fault
If the judge value exceeds the
Judge upper limit fault Relay
0000-FFFF upper limit load and is a fault, the
output destination number
specified relay switches ON
If the judge value is below the lower
Judge lower limit fault Relay
0000-FFFF limit load and is a fault, the specified
output destination number
relay switches ON
Register Load value when sensor is
DIF1 load value output 000-FFF
number executed is written to the specified
destination
1-32 Data width register
Register
DIF1 load position 000-FFF RAM position when DIF 1 occurs is
number
output destination written to the specified register
1-32 Data width
DIF1 relay output Relay When DIF 1 occurs, the relay
0000-FFFF
destination number switches ON.

Functions 83 Electro Press JP-S


16. DIF 2 Sensor/Given Pos.
DIF2 Sensor is done between the Sensor Begin Pos. and the Sensor End Pos. during executing the
step.
[Load]

Upper Lim. Load of DIF2

Load increased (N)/distance(mm)

Load of DIF2

Lower Lim. Load of DIF2

Position of DIF2
[Position]
Sampling Start Position Sampling End Position

Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Sampling Start 0.000 – max. Position at which load sampling is
mm
Position stroke length started
0.000 – max. Position at which load sampling is
Sampling End position mm
stroke length ended
Lower limit value of judge value
range
Lower limit load of -max. load –
N Judge lower limit fault if the DIF2
DIF2 max. load
judge value is below the lower limit
value
Upper limit value of judge value
Upper limit load of -max. load – range
N
DIF2 max. load Judge upper limit fault if the DIF2
judge value exceeds this value
Ram Lower Limit Sensor: if the load
increment amount (N/mm) per unit
of distance exceeds this value, this
is deemed that DIF 2 occurred
(enter positive numbers into the
-999999 – slant value).
Slant Value N/mm
999999 Ram Upper Limit Sensor: if the load
increment amount (N/mm) per unit
of distance falls below this value,
this is deemed that DIF 2 occurred
(enter negative numbers into the
slant value).
Invalid/End
Action on no DIF ― DIF did not occur during sampling
program
Judge result when pressing is
OK/Fault when out of ended
OK/Fault ―
judge area without arriving at the judge start
position
Invalid/End Operation when judge result was
Action on Judge Fault ―
program “fault”

Functions 84 Electro Press JP-S


Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Judge OK output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is OK
Judge fault output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is fault
If the judge value exceeds the
Judge upper limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number upper limit load and is a fault, the
output destination
specified relay switches ON
If the judge value is below the lower
Judge lower limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number limit load and is a fault, the
output destination
specified relay switches ON
DIF2 load value output 000 – FFF Register number Load value when sensor is
executed is written to the specified
destination 1 – 32 Data width register
DIF2 position value 000 – FFF Register number RAM position when DIF2 occurs is
output destination 1 – 32 Data width written to the specified register.
When DIF2 occurs, the relay
DIF2 relay output
0000 – FFFF Relay number switches
destination
ON.

17. DIF2 Sensor/Given dis.


DIF2 Sensor is done between the Sensor Begin Pos. and the Sensor End Pos. during executing the
section. The distance origin is the section start position.

[Load]
Upper Lim. Load of
DIF2

Load increased (N)/distance(mm)


Load of DIF2

Lower Lim. Load of


DIF2

Position of DIF2
[Position]
Sampling Start Position Sampling End Position

Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Step Start
Distance Origin Reference position for judge start
Position/Register ―
Selection distance/judge end distance
number
Sampling Start -max. stroke length – Position at which load sampling is
mm
Position max. stroke length started (from the distance origin)
-max. stroke length – Position at which load sampling is
Sampling End position mm
max. stroke length ended (from the distance origin)
Lower limit value of judge value range.
Lower limit load of -max. load – max. Judge lower limit fault if the DIF2
N
DIF2 load judge value is below the lower limit
value

Functions 85 Electro Press JP-S


Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
Upper limit value of judge value range
Upper limit load of -max. load – max.
N Judge upper limit fault if the DIF2
DIF2 load
judge value exceeds this value
Ram Lower Limit Sensor: if the load
increment amount (N/mm) per unit of
distance exceeds this value, this is
deemed that DIF 2 occurred (enter
positive numbers into the slant value).
Slant Value -999999 - 999999 N/mm Ram Upper Limit Sensor: if the load
increment amount (N/mm) per unit of
distance falls below this value, this is
deemed that DIF 2 occurred (enter
negative numbers into the slant
value).
Operation when judge result was
Action on no DIF Invalid/ End program ―
“fault”
Judge result when pressing is ended
OK/Fault when out of
OK/Fault ― without arriving at the judge start
judge area
position
Operation when judge result was
Action on judge fault Invalid/End program ―
“fault”
Judge OK output Relay Specified relay switches ON when
0000-FFFF
destination number judge is OK
Judge fault output Relay Specified relay switches ON when
0000-FFFF
destination number judge is fault
If the judge value exceeds the upper
Judge upper limit fault Relay
0000-FFFF limit load and is a fault, the specified
output destination number
relay switches ON
If the judge value is below the lower
Judge lower limit fault Relay
0000-FFFF limit load and is a fault, the specified
output destination number
relay switches ON
Register
000-FFF
DIF2 load value output number Load value when sensor is executed
destination Data is written to the specified register
1-32
width
Register
000-FFF
DIF2 load position number RAM position when DIF2 occurs is
output destination Data written to the specified register
1-32
width
DIF2 relay Relay When DIF2 occurs, the relay switches
0000-FFFF
Output destination number ON.

Functions 86 Electro Press JP-S


18. Position Sensor (End of the Step)
Position sensor is made at the end of the step. The ram position is judged at the end of pressing drive.

Step End Position [Time]

Lower limit fault


Lower limit position

OK

Upper limit position Judge value

[Position] Upper limit fault

Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
0.000 – max. Lower limit value of judge value
Lower limit position mm
stroke length range
0.000 – max. Upper limit value of judge value
Upper limit position mm
stroke length range
Invalid/End Upper limit value of judge value
Action on Judge Fault ―
program range
Judge OK output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is OK
Judge fault output Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay number
destination judge is fault
If the judge value exceeds the
Judge upper limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number upper limit load and is a fault, the
output destination
specified relay switches ON
If the judge value is below the lower
Judge lower limit fault
0000 – FFFF Relay number limit load and is a fault, the specified
output destination
relay switches ON
Judge load value 000 – FFF Register number Load value when judge is executed
output destination 1 – 32 Data width is written to the specified register
000 – FFF Register number The RAM position when the judge is
Judge position output
made is written to the specified
destination 1 – 32 Data width
register

Functions 87 Electro Press JP-S


3.5.5 Differential Sensors
 Processing Average Movements
An average movement value is appointed to take position and load discrepancies into consideration.
The settable parameters are described below.

• Differential Sampling Interval


Select the sampling quantity for calculating “load” and “position” average movement values in 1ms
cycles. (Select from 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128ms)

DIF (inclination), average movement position, and the average movement load are calculated in 1ms
cycles.
Also, the importance of the average movement is made according to the “Differential Sampling
Interval.”

128 step buffer (128ms sample)

Load

Average movement load is calculated in 1ms


cycles.
The quantity of data used in the average value
LOADAVG_0 calculation differs according to the sampling time
settings (2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128ms). The example
LOADAVG_1 above is a 4ms sample.

128 step buffer (128ms sample)

Position

The position is updated in 2ms cycles therefore the


same position data is lined up two at a time.
Average movement position is calculated in 1ms
cycles.
The quantity of data used in the average value
POSAVG_0 calculation differs according to the sampling time
settings (2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128ms). The example
POSAVG_1 above is a 4ms sample.

Functions 88 Electro Press JP-S


The differential (incline) is calculated according to the following:

• Differential (DIF1)
DIF1=LOADAVG_1-LOADAVG_0 [N/s]

• Differential (DIF2)
DIF2=(LOADAVG_1-LOADAVG_0) / (POSAVG_1-POSAVG_0) [N/mm]

The differential sampling interval needs to be adjusted to the appropriate value according to the press
conditions such as the workpiece and press speed etc.
If the differential sampling interval is too short, the “position” and “load” data will be exposed to noise
and statistical fluctuations causing discrepancies to appear. If this happens, the DIF will look as if it is
occurring before the “actual DIF position.”
On the other hand, if the differential sampling interval is too long, the “position” and “load” data
discrepancies are contained, however, the “response delay” will be too large causing the DIF to look as
if it is occurring after the “actual DIF position.”

Load
Short DIF sampling interval

Optimum DIF sampling interval

DIF1 = Load Increase (N) / Distance (mm)


Long DIF sampling interval

Position
Actual DIF position

If you look at a DIF sampling interval


which is too short, this position
If you look at a DIF sampling interval
appears as the DIF position.
which is too long, this position
appears as the DIF position

Functions 89 Electro Press JP-S


 DIF Judgment (5ms cycle)

Load

DIF Upper
Load Limit
DIF1 = Load Increase (N) / Distance (mm)
DIF Load

DIF Lower
Load Limit

DIF Pos.
Position
Sampling Start Sampling End
Position Position

5ms

DIF N DIF N DIF Y DIF N DIF Y DIF Y DIF Y DIF Y DIF Y DIF Y

Differential Position Pos.


Instant values

Differential Load Load

Time

With the diagram above, when the following conditions are met, the cycle is judged as having a
differential (DIF Y):

DIF 1 > inclination sensor value


Both differential sensors 1 and 2 use the same formula.

Functions 90 Electro Press JP-S


 How Inclination Sensor Values are Decided

1. Take a test shot and estimate the inclination values from the graph shown in Sampler.

Load [N]

11666(N/mm)

1000(N/mm)

Pos. [mm]

In the diagram above, the inclination before the DIF occurs is estimated at 1000 (N/mm) and the
inclination after the DIF occurs is estimated at 11666 (N/mm).

2. The validity of the inclination value is verified through the numerical data of the position that the DIF
occurs at in the CSV file. If you set the time series data to “average movement value” and also set
“Time Series Data Interval” to “Differential Sampling Interval” with the closest value, the trend is
even easier to read.

Example: Differential Sensor Sampling Interval is 16ms:


Set the time series data sampling interval to 20ms.

Example: Differential Sensor Sampling Interval is 32ms:


Set the time series data sampling interval to 50ms.

Functions 91 Electro Press JP-S


Below is an excerpt of a CSV file.
This shot consisted of the following: Stop on the Event (DIF stop, 1mm/s)  Stop at the Setting
Increasing Load (5mm/s), and the DIF occurrence position was 41.768mm. Also, the differential sensor
sampling interval is 16ms and the time series data sampling interval is 20ms.

Inclination
Position (mm) Load (N)
(N/mm)
41.694 2425
41.719 2461 1440
41.74 2481 952
2842
41.759 2535
10428 DIF Occurrence Point
41.78 2754
12333
41.798 2976
13581
41.853 3723 12853
41.928 4687

Because the inclination at the time of DIF occurrence is 10428 (N/mm), the inclination judgment value
is set to 8000 (N/mm) to take discrepancies into consideration.

3.6 Step IO
The status of executing the step or the value of result can be output to a relay or register. Output data
can be referred to though an external device for detailed control.
Setting items are shown below and the items can be set in each step.

Name IO Type Function


Step executing output Output Relay ON: Step executing
Step driving output Output Relay ON: Step driving
Step holding time Output Relay ON: Step holding time
output
Step start position Output Numerical Step start position is output
Step executing OFF  ON: Data confirmed
Step end position Output Numerical Step end position is output
Step executing OFF  ON: Data cleared,
ON  OFF: Data confirmed
Step start load Output Numerical Step start load is output
Step executing OFF  ON: Data confirmed
Step end load Output Numerical Step end load is output
Step executing OFF  ON: Data cleared,
ON  OFF: Data confirmed
Step drive end Input Relay OFF  ON: Decrease speed and holding time
command
Step end command Input Relay OFF  ON: End step

Functions 92 Electro Press JP-S


3.6.1 Step IO Timing Chart (Normal)

Program home position

Approach drive

Approach end position


Probe drive
Work touch position
Return drive

Step drive

Pressing end position

Step executing output

Step driving output

Step holding time output

Step start position

Step start load

Step end position

Step end load

Functions 93 Electro Press JP-S


3.6.2 Step IO Timing Chart (Step Drive End Input)
If the step drive end command is turned OFF  ON, driving will be ended for holding time (in case the
holding time is 0, step executing will be ended).

Program home position


Approach drive

Approach end position


Probe drive
Work touch position

Return drive
Step drive

Pressing end position

Step drive end command

Step end command

Step executing output

Step driving output

Step holding time output

Step start position

Step start load

Step end position

Step end load

Functions 94 Electro Press JP-S


3.6.3 Step IO Timing Chart (Step End Input)
If the step end command is turned OFF  ON, the step executing will be ended and the next step will
be started. In case the last step is being executed, the return will be started (refer to the diagram).

Program home position


Approach drive

Approach end position


Probe drive

Work touch position


Return drive
Step drive

Pressing end position

Step end command

Step executing output

Step driving output

Step holding time output

Step start position

Step start load

Step end position

Step end load

Functions 95 Electro Press JP-S


4. EXTERNAL CONTROL

4.1 Control by Relay/Register (IO Memory)


The Electro Press (JP-S) is operated by control signals from an external source.
Physically, there are four kinds below.
• Digital Input/Output (DIO)
• Fieldbus
• Ethernet
• RS232C
And control signals are passed through one of these to the press.

There are domains which are connected to the DIO, fieldbus, Ethernet or RS232C (external
connection domains) and internal domains that can be used for program setting data.
The combination of these two domains is called the “IO Memory”. The address is specified for the IO
memory by the relay number or relay number.
The relay is 1-bit memory. The location (address) of the relay is specified by the hexadecimal number
of the relay.
Registers are composed of 1 word (16-bit). As the register number is the relay number expressed in
base 16 excluding the lowest digit (O-F), the register indicates the same location (address) as the relay.
For example, if the relay number is 1810 (base 16), the register number would be 181 (base 16).

The press can be controlled externally by the user assigning the “Special Relay/Special
Register” or “Setting Data” (step end position or judge load etc.) functions to the IO memory.

The IO memory address (number) is as shown on the next page.

Functions 96 Electro Press JP-S


Relay Register
Name Point Function
number Number
1. Digital 000 - 001 Domain that corresponds to the input terminal
Input 0000 –
Input / of the digital input/output (DIO).
17 points 0010
Output DIN1-DIN17
(DIO) 070 - 070 Domain that corresponds to the output
Output 0700 –
terminal of the digital input/output (DIO).
16 points 070F
DOUT1~DOUT166
2. Field bus Input 100 - 17F
1000 – Domain that corresponds to the fieldbus input
2048
17FF (external PLC writes, and press reads).
points
Output 180 - 1FF
1800 – Domain that corresponds to the fieldbus output
2048
1FFF (press writes, and external PLC reads).
points
3. Ethernet Input
2000 – 200 – Domain that corresponds to the Ethernet input
2048
27FF 27F (external device writes, and press reads).
points
Output Domain that corresponds to the Ethernet
2800 – 280 –
2048 output (press writes, and external device
2FFF 2FF
points reads).
4. RS232C Input
3000 – 300 – Domain that corresponds to the RS232c input
2048
37FF 37F (external device writes, and press reads).
points
Output Domain that corresponds to the RS232C
3800 – 380 –
2048 output (press writes, and external device
3FFF 3FF
points reads).
5. Internal Set data can be used in this domain.
Input/output with external device cannot be
Domain used.
(Internal relay For example, the distance origin in the
16384 C000 – C00 –
internal register) points distance drive can be used. When the event is
FFFF FFF
stopped etc, it is possible to specify the
distance drive as the start point for the top load
occurrence position by writing the top load
judge position.

The press can be controlled from an external device such as a sequencer by assigning the “Special
Relay/Register” functions to the specified IO memory.
To assign the special relay/register, use JP-S designer.
Each IO memory needs to be assigned each function one by one. However, it is possible to assign
multiple functions to an IO memory. To eliminate and check the multiple assignment of functions to
register, use “IO cross reference” of JP-S designer.

Functions 97 Electro Press JP-S


IO memory Special Relay/Register

DIO Common functions


0000 Home position return
0001 Execute program
DIO Home position
return

Field Bus program

DeviceNet
ProfiBus Program functions
CC-Link

Ether Net Execute program


280 Current load
EhterNet
IO relay read/write
Monitor output function

RS232C
Current load
RS232C Link
IO relay read/write

“Home position return” and “Execute program” can be performed from DIO when special relay/register
are assigned to the IP memory shown above. You can also display the current load throught EtherNet
link.

Functions 98 Electro Press JP-S


Function to assign “Special Relay/Register” functions to specified IO memory.

Assign each function to IO memory.


To access each IO memory, please refer to the following chapters.
5. Digital Input/Output (DIO)
6. Field Bus
7.5. EtherNet IO (controlled by relay/register access)
8. RS232C

Functions 99 Electro Press JP-S


4.1.1 Specification Method of the IO Memory
There are 3 methods for specifying the IO memory address.

1. Specify as the bit unit. Relay number specification


2. Specify as the word unit. Register number specification
3. Specify as the top relay number and the data width specification.
Width with relay number specification.

1. Bit Unit Specifying Method


The bit unit can be specified using the relay number.

Bit number is displayed

Register number is displayed

For example, relay number 101C is shown as below.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Register number
100
101
102

Relay number: 101C

2. Register (word data) specification method


Word data can be shown by the register number.

Register number is displayed

The data width is 1 word (16-bit) or 2 words (long word) (32-bit).


For example, if the register number is 102 and data width is 2 words, they are displayed as shown
below.
FEDCB A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 bit Number
Register number
101

Register number: 102 102


Data width: 2 words 103

Functions 100 Electro Press JP-S


3. Width Specification Method
When specifying data that has a width as opposed to a register separation, specify the relay number
and data width.

Register number FEDCB A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number


100
101
102

Relay number: 1013


Data width: 26

4.1.2 Expressing Register Data


Data of 2 words, 32-bit can be assigned in two consecutive registers. For example, If the current
position (monitor output function) is assigned in register numbers 180 and 181, the data will be output
as follows.

Register 180 86A0H In case of the current position as 100


100.000  186A0H(100000)
Register 181 0001H

Accordingly, data of two words is transferred in order of the upper word and the lower word (big
endian).
However, data of two words is assigned in IO memory in order of the lower word and the upper word
(little endian). Note that data will be assigned in Ethernet access in the reversed order of that of result
data transfer.

• Position data is expressed in 0.001mm units, long word (2 words, 32-bit).

Example: Data: 999.999mm  Binary display: 000F423FH

• Load data is expressed in 1N units, long word (2 words, 32-bit).

Example: Data: 200000N (20t)  Binary display: 00030D40 H

• Acceleration data is expressed in 1mm/s2 units, long word (2 words, 32-bit).

Example: Data: 2000mm/s2  Binary display: 000007D0 H

Functions 101 Electro Press JP-S


• Speed data is expressed in 0.01mm/s units, long word (2 words, 32-bit).

Example: Data: 200.00mm/s  Binary display: 00004E20 H

• Percentage data is expressed in 1% units, long word (2 words, 32-bit).

Example: Data: 100%  Binary display: 00000064 H

• Time data is expressed in 100 msec units, long word (2 words, 32-bit).

Example: Data: 900000ms (900s) → Binary display: 00002328 H

• Number (program number, step number, alarm/failure number)


Number data is expressed in long word (1 words, 16-bit).

NOTE
• Negative values are indicated as complement of 2.

4.2 Special Relay/Special Register


The special relay and special register are relays and registers that have special functions supplied in
advance by the system. By assigning a special relay/special register to the IO memory, that function
can be used externally. The “Relay type” is an ON/OFF signal, and the “numerical type” is 2 word
(32-bit) numerical data.

Note: The single function of the special relay/special register can only be assigned to 1 place. For
example, the output for “Completion of mechanical initialization” cannot be output from both
DOUT3 and DOUT4 of the digital input/output DIO. Additionally, it cannot be output to both the
DIO and fieldbus. Similarly with the input function, the same input function cannot be assigned to
2 places, and input cannot be received from 2 places.
Of course, different functions can be assigned to separate locations. “During mechanical
initialize” can be assigned to DIO, and “completion of mechanical installation” assigned to the
fieldbus.

Functions 102 Electro Press JP-S


4.2.1 Common Functions (1) Return to Home Position
Name Input/Output Type Function
1. RAM Free Input Relay type ON: RAM is freed.
Command Servo is OFF, and brake is released.
If free is set, the RAM may drop due to its
weight.
OFF: RAM is held.
2. RAM Drive Power Output Relay type ON: Drive Power ON
Status OFF: Drive Power OFF
3. Mechanical Input Relay type OFF->ON: Mechanical initialize starts.
Initialization
4. During mechanical Output Relay type ON during mechanical initialize.
initialize
5. Completion of Output Relay type ON The mechanical initialization is
Mechanical complete, and it is shown that
Initialization programs can be run.
OFF The mechanical initialization needs
to be performed.
After switching the power on,
always perform mechanical
initialization once.
6. Urgent stop Input Relay type Urgent stop occurs when ON is set. The
Command program being executed is stopped, and
the servo ON condition is maintained
during the urgent stop. To release the
urgent stop, set to OFF.
7. Urgent stop Input Relay type Urgent stop occurs when OFF is set. The
Command (B) program being executed is stopped, and
the servo ON condition is maintained
during the urgent stop. To release the
urgent stop, set to ON.

Control Power

Drive Power

2. RAM Drive Power


Condition
3. Mechanical
initialization
4. During mechanical
initialize
5. Completion of
mechanical initialization

Functions 103 Electro Press JP-S


4.2.2 Common Functions (2) Errors
Name Input/Output Type Function
Output Relay type ON when a warning occurs.
1. Warning Refer to 6.2 Error Numbers in Setup and
Maintenance manual.
Output Relay type ON if the press is working properly. OFF if a
malfunction or alarm has occurred. If an
alarm occurs, the normal state is returned
2. Working
by removing the cause and resetting the
properly
alarm. If a malfunction occurs, it is
necessary to switch the power off and on
again.
3. Alarm Output Relay type ON when an alarm occurs.
4. Alarm Reset Input Relay type Alarm is reset.
Output Numerical type Displays the most recent warning or alarm.
Alarm #1 See 6.2 Error Numbers in the
Setup and Maintenance manual.
Alarm #2 Output Numerical type Second newest alarm.
Alarm #3 Output Numerical type Third newest alarm.
Alarm #4 Output Numerical type Fourth newest alarm.
Alarm #5 Output Numerical type Fifth newest alarm.
Alarm #6 Output Numerical type Sixth newest alarm.
Alarm #7 Output Numerical type Seventh newest alarm.
Alarm #8 Output Numerical type Eighth newest alarm.

Control Power

Drive Power

1. Warning

2. Working Properly

3. Alarm

4. Alarm Reset

Functions 104 Electro Press JP-S


4.2.3 Common Functions (3) Mode and Calendar
Name Input/Output Type Function
During setting data Output Relay During transfer of setting data with PC
ransmission type software (designer).
(Under development)
Setting with PC (Under Output Relay While setting with PC software
development) type (JP-S designer).
Setting with Pendant Output Relay While setting with the pendant unit.
(Under development) type
Calendar Year Output Numerical Year (YYYY) display YYYY: 2000-2099
type
Calendar month/date Output Numerical Month Date (MMDD) display MM: 1-12
type DD: 1-31
Calendar Time Output Numerical Hours Minutes (Hamm) Display
type HH: 0-23 mm: 0-59
Software Ver. AA Output Numerical Software Ver. number
type Ver. AA.BB.CC
Software Ver. BB Output Numerical
type
Software Ver. CC Output Numerical
type

4.2.4 Program Running


These input signals can be received in conditions other than those shown below.
• During setting data transmission
• During setting with PC
• During setting with Pendant Unit

Name Input/Output Type Function


1. Program Number Input Numerical Specifies the program number of the
type program executed by Start Program.
When “Set Program Number” is changed
from OFF  ON, this program number is
read.
2. Set Program Number Input Relay type When this signal is changed from OFF
ON, the program number is read.*
3. Set Program Number Response Relay type After reading the program number using
ACK Output Set Program Number, turn this signal ON
as the response signal.
4. The Program number Output Numerical Outputs the program number entered
setting value which type using Set Program Number.
has been set At present, this means the set program
number, and when “Start Program” is
turned OFF  ON, this program starts
running.

Functions 105 Electro Press JP-S


5. Go to the Program Input Relay type OFF  ON: Moves to the Program Home
Home Position Position.
When setting the “Return On/Off”
parameter to “Invalid”, moves to the
mechanical home position.
6. During go to the Output Relay type ON: During the go to the Program Home
Program Home Position
Position

1. Program Number

2. Set Program Number

3. Set Program Number


ACK

4. The Program Number


value which has been set

5. Go to the Program Home


Position

6. During go to the Home


Position

*If it takes time until a DIO signal is stable, secure time between program number setting and read
command.

Functions 106 Electro Press JP-S


Name Input/Output Type Function
1. Inhibit Program Input Relay ON: Instructs to ignore Start Program.
Execution type OFF: Instructs to receive Start Program.
2. During Inhibiting the Output Relay ON: Program Start is being ignored
Program Execution type OFF: Program Start is not being ignored
When OFF, it shows that execution of the
program is not being prohibited.
3. Start Program Input Relay OFF-> ON: Program run is executed for
type the program displayed as the execute
program number. The program is executed
from the approach in order. Operation is
restarted after the emergency temporary
stop.
If this is switched to OFF after operation
has started, it does not stop.
It is necessary to switch to OFF before the
next start command. If the following
program is started when ON, the operation
is not started OFF->ON edge trigger.
4. Waiting for the Start of Output Relay ON: Waiting for the program to start
the Program type operating.
5. Executing the Program Output Relay ON: Program running is being executed.
type

1. Inhibit Program
Execution

2. During Inhibiting the


Program Execution

3. Start Program

4. Waiting for the Start of the


Program
Does not start
5. Executing the Program

Functions 107 Electro Press JP-S


Name Input/Output Type Function
1. Hold at Probe Input Relay type ON: Stops when probe is completed (when the
End touching load is reached).
OFF: The following steps are continued after
probe has ended.
Abort the Step Input Relay type OFF->ON: During pressing, the step switches to
(Under during the pressure holding. If the step is during
development) the pressure holding, that step is the final step.
2. During Output Relay type ON: During approach.
Approach
3. During Probe Output Relay type ON: During probe.
4. During the Output Relay type ON: During the pressing.
Pressing
5. During the Output Relay type ON: During the pressure holding.
Pressure
holding

1. Hold at Probe End


Stop
Drive

2. During Approach

3. During Probe

4. During the Driving


Pressure

5. During the Driving


Holding

Executing the Program

Functions 108 Electro Press JP-S


Name Input/Output Type Function
1. Executing Step Output Numerical The step number that is during the pressing or
Number type during the pressure holding is output.
2. Executing Step Output Relay Rewrite timing is OFF for the executing step
Number Strobe type number. If time is required for the signal of the
digital input/output (DIO) to stabilize, make sure
that the executing program number is read when
this signal is ON.

Executing the Program

During approach

During probe

During the driving pressure

During the pressure holding

1. Executing Step Number

2. Executing Step Number strobe

Name Input/Output Type Function


1. OK of Output Relay OFF  ON: When the program running is complete, and all
Judge type of the judges executed during that program are not at fault.
Results ONOFF: When the program running is started
2. NG of Output Relay OFF ON: When the program running is complete, at least
Judge type one of the judges executed during that program has a fault.
Results ONOFF: When the program running is started

Executing the Program

1. OK of Judge Results

2. NG of Judge Results

Functions 109 Electro Press JP-S


Name Input/Output Type Function
Program normal end Output Relay OFF->ON:The program is complete
type without any emergency stops, and all
results (judges) were not “Fault”.
OFF->ON:When a program is executed.
Program abnormal end Output Relay OFF->ON:The program is complete with
type at least one emergency stop, or “Fault”
judge (result).
OFF->ON:When a program is executed.
Result data delete function Input Relay OFF->ON:To delete saved Result data
type (Quality control data and time-series data)
in Electro Press. The deleted data cannot
be read from a sampler..
Deleting Result data Output Relay ON:Deleting the Result data.
type ON->OFF: Finshed deleting the Result
data.

10ms(MIN)

Result data
delete function
10ms (MAX) 100ms (MIN)

Deleting
result data

“Deleting Result data” is processed when the press is in ”waiting program” status, and not
sending or receiving any data. Therefore, “Deleting Result data” can be delayed when
sending/receiving any Result data or programs (later than 100ms)
To prevent the delay, execute “Deleting Result Data” when the Press is not sending/receiving
any data.

Functions 110 Electro Press JP-S


4.2.5 External Running
Input/
Name Type Function
Output
1. External Running Input Relay type ON: Drives to the target location at the drive
with the Position speed.
OFF: Ends with the external command position
drive
External Running with Input Relay type ON: Drives only for the target distance at the
the Distance drive speed.
OFF: Ends with the external command distance
drive
External Running with Input Relay type ON: Drives to the target load at the drive speed.
the Load OFF: Ends with the external command load drive
2. The Speed of Input Numerical Specifies the speed for driving according to
External Running type external command operation.
0.00 – Max. speed (Approaching/Returning)
3. The Target Position Input Numerical Sets the target location for driving according to
of External Running type external command operation.
0.000 – 999.999mm
The Target Distance of Input Numerical Sets the target distance for driving according to
External Running type external command operation.
-999.999 – 999.999mm
The Target Load of Input Numerical Sets the target load for driving according to
External Running type external command operation.
0-Maximum Load
4. During External Output Relay type
ON: During external running.
Running
Stops when the command is OFF

1. External Running with the


Position
2. External Running Target
Speed

3. The Target Position of


External Running

4. During External Running


Arrival at target location

NOTE: The values for acceleration and deceleration during external running are fixed values (default
approach) for each model. You cannot change the value. Refer to the chart below for the
default approach.
Acceleration/Deceleration
Model Name
(Default Approach)
JP-S0501 –
JP-S5001 2000mm/s2
JP-S10T1 500mm/s2
JP-S20T1 250mm/s2

Functions 111 Electro Press JP-S


4.2.6 Monitor Output Function
Monitor output can be executed at any time after completion of mechanical initialization (see shared
function in 4.2.1).

Name Input/Output Type Function


Current Position Output Numerical Outputs the current position.
type
Current load Output Numerical Outputs the current load.
type
Reference Number Output Numerical Outputs the reference number of data monitor
of Data Monitor type
Strobe Signal of Output Relay Rewrite timing is OFF for the monitor data.
Data Monitor type If time is required for the signal to stabilize, make
sure that the monitor data is read when this
signal is ON.

The monitor output data is updated via the [Parameter] – [Monitor IO Updating Cycle] values in JP-S
Designer.
In order to read the data accurately, the “Reference Number of Data Monitor” is linked to the data
update for output. The reference number of data monitor operates cyclically after returning to the home
position is complete, as in 0655350.
If this reference number of data monitor is not changed between before and after data read, it is
considered that the data was read correctly (data rewrite did not occur midway).
Also, it is considered that this reference number of data monitor can be indexed and read for data
management.
10ms

Strobe Signal of
Data Monitor

Data

1 2 3 4 5
Reference Number
of Data Monitor
Update cycle

Program running
Update cycle
50ms, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 1000ms
Set in the system parameters

Functions 112 Electro Press JP-S


4.2.7 JOG Functions
Name Input/Output Type Function
JOG1 (-) Relay JOG moving is performed according to the
Input
command type parameters set in JOG environment setting. Refer to
JOG1 (+) Relay the diagram below for moving timing.
Input
Command type
JOG2 Relay Perform JOG move to the target location. Refer to the
Input
Command type diagram below for moving timing.
JOG2 Target Numerical
Input
Position type
JOG3 Relay Perform JOG move to the target load. Refer to the
Input
Command type diagram below for moving timing.
JOG3 Target Numerical
Input
Load type
During JOG Relay ON: During JOG moving.
Output
Moving type

 JOG Moving timing


Operates at
JOG Inching 800ms JOG speed 800ms
Distance

500ms (max)
JOG +
(+ Command)

JOG -
(- Command)

RAM + (Jog +)

RAM - (Jog -)

“JOG Speed” and “JOG Inching Distance” follow the settings in “JOG Environment Settings”.
Refer to “2.3 PC-JOG Environment Data Settings”.

Functions 113 Electro Press JP-S


4.2.8 Program Setting Register
This section explains function of program setting through IO memory.
The following operations can be made with the register.
• To add or delete a program
• To add or delete a step
• To add or delete a Step sensor
• To rewrite or read setting value of the program, step or Step sensor.

A set of plural consecutive memories is used as “program setting register”. The following numbers of
register are required.

• Input register: 10 words


• Output register: 4 words

Input or output IO memory is not assigned in 14-word registers which are individually specified.
It is assigned in the area from the top register number and automatically secured consecutive
numbers.

Input 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119 (10 words)
Output 190, 191, 192, 193 (4 words)

In the further explanations, each number (register address) will be shown as follows.
Input top+0, Input top+1, input top+2, ······, input top+9
Output top+0, output top+2, output top+3

Operation is specified by the command code of “input top+1”, however, it will be checked if the
command is feasible before executing. Command is feasible if the lowest bit of “output top+0” is 1.
After setting the command code and required parameter (value), set the lowest bit of “input top+0”
word as 0  1and the command will be executed. It is required to maintain the status 1 for 10 msec or
longer.
If the command execution is started, the lowest bit of “output top+0” word becomes 0: busy.
After operation is ended and it will be returned the lowest bit will be returned to 1: ready. In case an
error occurs, the bit1 of “output top+1” word becomes 1: error. Check the error code of “output top+1”
and solve the problem.
The next page shows a program creation register flowchart and timing chart.

Functions 114 Electro Press JP-S


Start

Ready ?
“Output top+0” word NO
Lowest bit 1?

YES

Set command code and parameter

Execute command
Set lowest bit of “input top+0” word as 0  1

Wait for 10msec or longer

Ready?
“Output top+0” word NO
Lowest bit 1?

YES

Set lowest bit of “input top+0” word as 1  0

Error?
“Output top+0” word NO
Bit1 1?

YES
Solve error code of “output top+1” word

End

Functions 115 Electro Press JP-S


Parameter

Command code

10msec or longer

Execute command

Can be executed

Error code

Save the data after modifying program


After adding/deleting program, adding/deleting step, adding/deleting Step sensor or rewriting value, the
modified data should be written to the FROM.
This is because each data is modified in the work area and data in the work area will be deleted when
the control power supply is turned off.
The data can be saved in the FROM by executing “command code 1000H: saving set data (write to
the FROM”. The modified data is maintained if the control power supply is turned off.

It will take approximately maximum 10msec to rewrite or read the data.


It may take approximately maximum 100msec to add or delete the data.
It will take several seconds – maximum 30 seconds to save the set data (to write to the FROM). If it
takes long to execute the command, check error code after the status of “ready” (after operation).

Functions 116 Electro Press JP-S


 Input register
Address Name Function
Input top+0 Execute command Use turning the lowest bit ON/OFF (relay)
Turn this signal OFF  ON and execute the
command
Input top+1 Command code 0000H: Add program
0001H: Delete program
0004H: Write program data
0005H: Read program data
0040H: Add step
0041H: Delete step
0044H: Write step data
0045H: Read step data
0060H: Add step data judge
0061H: Delete step data judge
0064H: Add step data judge data
0065H: Read step data judge data
1000H: Save set data (Write to FROM)
Input top+2 ID1 (program number) Specify program number
Input top+3 ID2 (step number) Specify step number
Input top+4 ID3 (judge number) Specify judge number
Input top+5 System reserve Extra
Input top+6 Item number Refer to and specify the number from “Item” in the
editing table.
Input top+7 System reserve Extra
Input top+8 Data (lower) Lower word of data to be written
Input top+9 Data (upper) Upper word of data to be written

Functions 117 Electro Press JP-S


 Output register
Address Name Function
Output top+0 Command bit0 Lowest bit Command executing (0: busy 1: Ready)
executing bit1 Error (0:Normal 1:Error)
Output top+1 Error code 0: Normal
2: Command error
- Command with no function assigned was specified.
3: Add error
- Exceeded the maximum number.
- Step or step sensor was added to non-existent program.
4: Delete error
- No data to be deleted
5: Out of range of setting data
- Entered value exceeding maximum or minimum value of
the item.
6: Write error
- Wrote to non-existent program or non-existent step data.
- Wrote to non-existent item number (including item under
development).
7: Read error
- Read non-existent program or non-existent step data.
- Read non-existent item number (including item under
development).
8: Out of program number range
- During adding or deleting program
9:Program running error
- Entered add/delete command during running
Output top+2 Data (lower) Lower word of data to be read
Output top+3 Data (upper) Upper word of data to be read

Functions 118 Electro Press JP-S


Setting range may vary among models and maximum strokes.
 Setting range among models
Value Type Affected Function Setting Value Minimum Value Maximum Value
Load Value Model Name JP-S0501-00 5kN
JP-S0501-01 5kN
JP-S1001-00 10kN
JP-S1001-01 10kN
JP-S1501-00 15kN
JP-S2001-00 20kN
JP-S2001-01 20kN
JP-S3001-00 0N 30kN
JP-S3001-11 30kN
JP-S5001-00 50kN
JP-S5R01-00 50kN
JP-S5001-0S 50kN
JP-S10T1-00 100kN
JP-S10R1-00 100kN
JP-S20T1-00 200kN
Position Maximum Stroke 100mm 100mm
150mm 150mm
200mm 200mm
250mm 250mm
0mm
300mm 300mm
350mm 350mm
400mm 400mm
450mm 450mm
Distance Maximum Stroke 100mm -100mm 100mm
150mm -150mm 150mm
200mm -200mm 200mm
250mm -250mm 250mm
300mm -300mm 300mm
350mm -350mm 350mm
400mm -400mm 400mm
450mm -450mm 450mm
Speed Model Name JP-S0501-00 216mm/s
JP-S0501-01 216mm/s
JP-S1001-00 216mm/s
JP-S1001-01 208mm/s
JP-S1501-00 200mm/s
JP-S2001-00 200mm/s
JP-S2001-01 160mm/s
JP-S3001-00 0.01mm/s 210mm/s
JP-S3001-11 210mm/s
JP-S5001-00 200mm/s
JP-S5R01-00 200mm/s
JP-S5001-0S 120mm/s
JP-S10T1-00 100mm/s
JP-S10R1-00 100mm/s
JP-S20T1-00 50mm/s
NOTE
• The maximum value of speed is the ram speed at the time of approach and return. Take caution as
the maximum speed at pressing is different.

Functions 119 Electro Press JP-S


Acceleration/ Model Name JP-S0501-00
Deceleration JP-S0501-01
JP-S1001-00
JP-S1001-01
JP-S1501-00
JP-S2001-00 3500mm/s2
JP-S2001-01
JP-S3001-00 1mm/s2
JP-S3001-11
JP-S5001-00
JP-S5R01-00
JP-S5001-0S 1500mm/s2
JP-S10T1-00
600mm/s2
JP-S10R1-00
JP-S20T1-00 300mm/s2

To invalidate function of the item with register specified, set data width as 0. It is the same condition as
no relay number set.
Default register number and default data width of new data is as follows.

Value Default
Relay number 0FFF
Data width 0(Function is invalid)

 0000H: Add program


To add a program (with a step of drive)
Add a program by entering the program number in “Input top+2” and the drive mode of the first step in
“Input top+6 (item number)”.

Address Name Function


Input top+1 Command code 0000H: Add program
Input top+2 ID1(Program number) Specify the program number.
Input top+6 Item number Specify the drive mode.
1: Const Speed/Stop at the set pos.
2: Const Speed/Stop at the set dis.
3: Const Speed/Stop at the set load
4: Const Speed/Stop at the set inc. load
5: Const Speed/Stop on the event (under development)
6: Const Load/Stop after set time (under development)
7: Const Load/Stop at set pos.(under development)
8: Const Load/Stop at set dis.(under development)
9: Const Load/Stop on the event
Set “Input top+3 (step number)”, “Input top+4 (Step sensor number)”, “Input top+8 (lower data)” and
“Input top+9 (upper data)” as 0.

Functions 120 Electro Press JP-S


 0001H: Delete program
To delete a program
Delete a program by specifying the program number in “Input top+2”.
Set “Input top+3 (step number)”, “Input top+4 (Step sensor number)”, “Input top+8 (lower data)” and
“Input top+9 (upper data)” as 0.

 0004H: Write program data


 0005H: Read program data
Write or read program data by specifying the program number in “Input top+2” and the item number in
“Input top+6”.
Set values will be written in “Input top+8 (lower data)” “Input top+9 (upper data)” in writing.
Values will be read in “Output top+2 (lower data)” and “Output top+3 (upper data)”.

Item Item no. Setting Range


Prog. Home Position 0 Model (Position)
Approach Y/N 1 1:Enable 0:Disable
Approach Speed 2 Model (Speed)
Approach Acc, 3 1 – Maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Approach Dec, 4 1 – Maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
Begin Position 5 Model (Position)
Max. Pressure (Approach) 6 Model (Load)
Probe Y/N 7 1:Enable 0:Disable
Probe Speed 8 Model(Speed)
Probe Acc. 9 1 – Maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Probe Dec. 10 1 – Maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
Touching Load 11 Model(Load)
Probe Limit Pos. 12 Model(Position)
Return to Prog. Home Y/N 13 1:Enable 0:Disable
Return Speed 14 Model(Speed)
Return Acc. 15 1 – Maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Return Dec. 16 1 – Maximum deceleration [mm/s2]

Functions 121 Electro Press JP-S


 0040H: Add step
Add a step by specifying the program number in “Input top+2” and the drive mode in “Input top+6(Item
number)”.

Address Name Function


Input top+1 Command code 0040H: Add step
Input top+2 ID1 (Program number) Specify program number
Input top+6 Item number Specify drive mode
1: Const Speed/Stop at the set pos.
2: Const Speed/Stop at the set dis.
3: Const Speed/Stop at the set load
4: Const Speed/Stop at the set inc. load
5: Const Speed/Stop on the event (under development)
6: Const Load/Stop after set time (under development)
7: Const Load/Stop at set pos. (under development)
8: Const Load/Stop at set dis. (under development)
9: Const Load/Stop on the event (under development)
Set “Input top+3 (step number)”, “Input top+4 (Step sensor number)”, “Input top+8 (lower data)” and
“Input top+9 (upper data)” as 0.

NOTE
• Step number cannot be designated. Step is added to the end and cannot be inserted in the middle.

 0041H:Delete step
Delete a step by specifying the program number in “Input top+2”.
Set “Input top+3 (step number)”, “Input top+4 (Step sensor number)”, Input top +6 (item number ),
“Input top+8 (lower data)” and “Input top+9 (upper data)” as 0.

NOTE
• Step number cannot be designated. The last step is deleted in “Delete step” Step in the middle
cannot be deleted.

 0044H: Write step data


 0045H: Read step data
Write or read step data by specifying the program number in “Input top+2” and the step number in
“Input top+3”.
Set “Input top+4 (Step sensor number)” as 0. Item number varies depending on drive mode of the step.
Drive mode (Item number0) is only for reading. Drive mode cannot be written. To change drive mode,
delete the current drive mode and specify the new drive model

Functions 122 Electro Press JP-S


 Const Speed/Stop at the set pos. data
Item
Item Setting Range
number
Drive mode 0 1: Const Speed/Stop at the set pos.
Speed 1 Model(Speed)
Acceleration 2 1 – Maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Deceleration 3 1 – Maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
Max. Pressure 4 Model(Load)
End Position 5 Model(Position)
Holding Time 6 0.0 – 999.9s

 Const Speed/Stop at the set dis. data


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Drive mode 0 2: Const Speed/Stop at the set dis.
Speed 1 Model(Speed)
Acceleration 2 1 – Maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Deceleration 3 1 – Maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
Max. Pressure 4 Model(Load)
Pressing Distance 5 Model(Position)
Holding Time 6 0.0-999.9s
Continuation/Isolation (under
7
development
Distance Start Value 8 0: Last step end position 1: Refer to register
Register Number of Distance 9 Register number
Origin Position 10 Bit width

 Const Speed/Stop at the set load data


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Drive mode 0 3: Const Speed/Stop at the set load
Speed 1 Model (Speed)
Acceleration 2 1 – Maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Deceleration 3 1 – Maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
Descending Limit Pos. 4 Model (Position)
End Load 5 Model (Load)
Slow Down Load Rate 6 0 – 100%
Stop Ref. Pos'n 7 Model (Position)
Holding Time 8 0.0 – 999.9s

Functions 123 Electro Press JP-S


 Const Speed/Stop at the set inc. load data
Item
Item Setting Range
number
Drive mode 0 4: Const Speed/Stop at the set inc. load
Speed 1 Model (Speed)
Acceleration 2 1 – Maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Deceleration 3 1 – Maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
Descending Limit Pos. 4 Model (Position)
Increment Load of Value at
5 Model (Load)
End
Slow Down Load Rate 6 0 – 100%
Stop Ref. Pos'n 7 Model (Position)
Holding Time 8 0.0 – 999.9s
Continuation/Isolation (under
9
development
Distance Start Value 10 0: Last step end position 1: Refer to register
Register Number of Distance 11 Register number
Origin Position 12 Bit width

 Const Speed/Stop on the event data


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Drive mode 0 5: Const Speed/Stop on the event
Speed 1 Model (Speed)
Acceleration 2 1 – Maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Deceleration 3 1 – Maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
Descending Limit Pos. 4 Model (Position)
Increment Load of Value at 5 Model (Load)
End
Holding Time 6 0.0 – 999.9s
Stop on the event relay 7 Number of Relay
8 Relay 0:Falut 1: OK

 Const Load/Stop after set time


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Drive mode 0 6: Const Load/Stop after set time
Speed 1 Model (Speed)
Pressing Load 2 Model (Load)
Pressing TIme 3 0.0 – 999.9s
Gain Number 4 1 – 16
Descending Limit Pos. 5 Model (Position)
Holding Time 6 0.0 – 999.9s

Functions 124 Electro Press JP-S


 Const Load/Stop at set pos.
Item
Item Setting Range
number
Drive mode 0 7: Const Load/Stop at set pos. (under development)
Max. Speed 1 Model (Speed)
Maximum Pressing TIme 2 0.0 – 999.9s
Pressing Load 3 Model (Load)
End Position 4 Model (Load)
Gain Number 5 1 – 16
Holding Time 6 0.0 – 999.9s

 Const Load/Stop at set dis.


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Drive mode 0 8: Const Load/Stop at set dis.
Max. Speed 1 Model (Speed)
Maximum Pressing TIme 2 0.0 – 999.9s
Pressing Load 3 Model (Load)
Pressing Distance 4 Model (Distance)
Gain Number 5 1 – 16
Holding Time 6 0.0 – 999.9s
Continuous/Singular (under 7
development)
Drive Distance Start Value 9 0: End position of previous step 1: Refer to register
Reg. Number of Dis. start 10 Register number
value 11 Bit width

 Const Load/Stop on the event


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Drive mode 0 9: Const Load/Stop on the event
Max. Speed 1 Model (Speed)
Maximum Pressing TIme 2 0.0 – 999.9s
Pressing Load 3 Model (Load)
Descending Limit Pos. 4 Model (Position)
Gain Number 5 1 – 16
Holding Time 6 0.0 – 999.9s
Stop on the event relay 7 Number of relay
8 Relay 0:Falut 1: OK

Functions 125 Electro Press JP-S


 0060H: Add Step sensor
Add Step sensor by specifying the program number in “Input top+2”, the step number in “Input top+3”
and the sensor type in “Input top+6 (Item number)”.
Address Name Function
Input top+1 Command code 0060H: Add step sensor
Input top+2 ID1 (Program number) Specify program number
Input top+3 ID2 (Step number) Specify step number
Input top+6 Item number Specify sensor type
1:Load Sensor/Given position
2:Load Sensor/Given distance
3:Position Sensor
4:Peak load Sensor/Given position
5:Peak load Sensor/Given distance
6:Bottom load Sensor/Given position
7:Bottom load Sensor/Given distance
8:Top load Sensor/Given position
9:Top load Sensor/Given distance
10:Valley load Sensor/Given position
11:Valley load Sensor/Given distance
12:Peak to peak Sensor/Given position
13:Peak to peak Sensor/Given distance
14:DIF1 Sensor/Given Pos.
15:DIF1 Sensor/Given dis.
16:DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.
17:DIF2 Sensor/Given dis.
18:Position Sensor (End step)
Set “Input top+4 (Step sensor number)” as 0.
Set “Input top+8 (lower data)” and “Input top+9 (upper data)” as 0.

NOTE
• Step sensor number cannot be designated. Step sensor is added to the end and cannot be
inserted in the middle.

 0061H: Delete step sensor


Delete step sensor by specifying the program number in “Input top+2” and the step number in “Input
top+3”.
Set “Input top+4 (Step sensor number)” as 0
Set “Input top+6(Item number)”, “Input top+8(lower data)” and “Input top+9(upper data)” as 0.

NOTE
• Step sensor number cannot be designated. The last step sensor is deleted. Step sensor in the
middle cannot be deleted.

Functions 126 Electro Press JP-S


 0064H Write step sensor data
 0065H: Read step sensor data
Write or read step sensor data by specifying the program number in “Input top+2”, the step number in
“Input top+3”,the step sensor number in “Input top+4”, and the item number in “Input top+6”.
Note that items vary depending on step sensor type.
Set the item number as 0 to read the sensor type.
Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 1:Load Sensor/Given position
2:Load Sensor/Given distance
3:Position Sensor
4:Peak load Sensor/Given position
5:Peak load Sensor/Given distance
6:Bottom load Sensor/Given position
7:Bottom load Sensor/Given distance
8:Top load Sensor/Given position
9:Top load Sensor/Given distance
10:Valley load Sensor/Given position
11:Valley load Sensor/Given distance
12:Peak to peak Sensor/Given position
13:Peak to peak Sensor/Given distance
14:DIF1 Sensor/Given Pos.
15:DIF1 Sensor/Given dis.
16:DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.
17:DIF2 Sensor/Given dis.2
18:Position Sensor (End Step)
NOTE
• Sensor type cannot be written. To change sensor type, delete the current sensor type and specify a
sensor type.

Items for each sensor type are shown as below.

 Load Sensor/Given position


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 1: Load Sensor/Given position
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: End program 0: Disable
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay number 2 Relay number
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 2:Disable
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay number 4
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 2:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper(OUT)Relay
6
number
Sensor Fault of Upper(OUT)Relay
7 1: Enable 2:Disable
Y/N
Sensor Fault of Lower(OUT)Relay
8
number
Sensor Fault of Lower(OUT)Relay
9 1: Enable 2:Disable
Y/N

Functions 127 Electro Press JP-S


Item
Item Setting Range
number
The Load (OUT)Register number 10 Register number
11 Bit width
The Position (OUT)Register 12 Model(Position)
number 13 Bit width
Start Position 14 Model(Position)
End Position 15 Model(Position)
Upper Lim. Load at Start Pos. 16 Model(Load)
Lower Lim. Load at Start Pos. 17 Model(Load)
Upper Lim. Load at End Pos. 18 Model(Load)
Lower Lim. Load at End Pos. 19 Model(Load)
OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area 20 0: OK 1: Fault

 Load Sensor/Given distance


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 2: Load Sensor/Given distance
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: End Program 0: Disable
SENSOR OK (OUT)Relay number 2 Relay number
SENSOR OK (OUT)Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
SENSOR FAULT (OUT)Relay
4
number
SENSOR FAULT (OUT)Relay
5 1: Enable 0:Disable
Y/N
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT)Relay
6
number
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT)Relay
7 1: Enable 0:Disable
Y/N
Sensor Fault of Lower
8
(OUT)Relay number
Sensor Fault of Lower
9 1: Enable 0:Disable
(OUT)Relay Y/N
The Load (OUT) Register number 10 Register number
11 Bit width
The Position (OUT)Register 12 Register number
number 13 Bit width
Start Position 14 Model(Position)
End Position 15 Model(Position)
Upper Lim. Load at Start Pos. 16 Model(Load)
Lower Lim. Load at Start Pos. 17 Model(Load)
Upper Lim. Load at End Pos. 18 Model(Load)
Lower Lim. Load at End Pos. 19 Model(Load)
OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area 20 0: OK 1:Fault

Functions 128 Electro Press JP-S


 Position Sensor (Start Step)
Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 3: Position Sensor
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: End Program 0: Disable
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay number 2 Relay number
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay number 4
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay
6
number
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay Y/N 7 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) Relay
8
number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT)
9 1: Enable 0:Disable
Relay Y/N
The Load (OUT) Register number 10 Register number
11 Bit width
The Position (OUT) Register number 12 Register number
13 Bit width
Upper Limit Pos. 14 Model(Position)
Lower Limit Pos. 15 Model(Position)

 Peak load Sensor/Given position


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 4: Peak load Sensor/Given position
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: End Program 0: Disable
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay number 2 Relay number
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay number 4
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay
6
number
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay Y/N 7 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) Relay
8
number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) Relay Y/N 9 1: Enable 0:Disable
Reg. Num of Peak Load (OUT) 10 Register number
Register number 11 Bit width
Reg. Num of Peak Position (OUT) 12 Register number
Register number 13 Bit width
Sampling Start Pos. 14 Model (Position)
Sampling End Pos. 15 Model (Position)
Upper Lim. Load of Peak 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of Peak 17 Model (Load)
OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area 18 0: OK 1: Fault

Functions 129 Electro Press JP-S


 Peak load Sensor/Given distance
Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 5: Peak load Sensor/Given distance
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: End Program 0: Disable
SENSOR OK (OUT)Relay number 2 Relay number
SENSOR OK (OUT)Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
SENSOR FAULT (OUT)Relay
4
number
SENSOR FAULT (OUT)Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay
6
number
Sensor Fault of Upper(OUT)Relay
7 1: Enable 0:Disable
Y/N
Sensor Fault of Lower(OUT)Relay
8
number
Sensor Fault of Lower(OUT)Relay
9 1: Enable 0:Disable
Y/N
Reg. Num of Peak Load 10 Register number
(OUT)Register number 11 Bit width
Reg. Num of Peak Position (OUT) 12 Register number
Register number 13 Bit width
Sampling Begin Pos. 14 Model(Position)
Sampling End Pos. 15 Model(Position)
Upper Lim. Load of Peak 16 Model(Load)
Lower Lim. Load of Peak 17 Model(Load)
OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area 18 0: OK 1: Fault

 Bottom load Sensor/Given position


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 6: Bottom load Sensor/Given position
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: End Program 0: Disable
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay number 2 Relay number
Sensor OK (OUT)Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault (OUT)Relay number 4
Sensor Fault (OUT)Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper(OUT)Relay
6
number
Sensor Fault of Upper(OUT)Relay
7 1: Enable 0:Disable
Y/N
Sensor Fault of Lower(OUT)Relay
8
number
Sensor Fault of Lower(OUT)Relay
9 1: Enable 0:Disable
Y/N
10 Register number
Reg. Num of Bottom Load(OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Bottom Position (OUT)
13 Bit width

Functions 130 Electro Press JP-S


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sampling Start Pos. 14 Model(Position)
Sampling End Pos. 15 Model(Position)
Upper Lim. Load of Bottom 16 Model(Load)
Lower Lim. Load of Bottom 17 Model(Load))
OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area 18 0: OK 1:Fault

 Bottom load Sensor/Given distance


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 7: Bottom load Sensor/Given distance
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: End Program 0: Disable
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay number 2 Relay number
Sensor OK (OUT)Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay number 4
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper(OUT)Relay
6
number
Sensor Fault of Upper(OUT)Relay
7 1: Enable 0:Disable
Y/N
Sensor Fault of Lower(OUT)Relay
8
number
Sensor Fault of Lower(OUT)Relay
9 1: Enable 0:Disable
Y/N
10 Register number
Reg. Num of Bottom Load(OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Bottom Position(OUT)
13 Bit width
Sampling Start Pos 14 Model (Position)
Sampling End Pos. 15 Model (Position)
Upper Lim. Load of Bottom 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of Bottom 17 Model (Load)
OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area 18 0: OK 1: Fault

Functions 131 Electro Press JP-S


 Top load Sensor/Given position
Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 8: Top load Sensor/Given position
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: End Program 0: Disable
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay number 2 Relay number
Sensor OK (OUT)Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay number 4
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay
6
number
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay
7 1: Enable 0:Disable
Y/N
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) Relay
8
number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) Relay
9 1: Enable 0:Disable
Y/N
Reg. Num of Top Load 10 Register 10 Register number
number(OUT) 11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Top Pos. (OUT)
13 Bit width
Sampling Start Position. 14 Model (Position)
Sampling End Position 15 Model (Position)
Sampling End Pos. 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of Top 17 Model (Load)
OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area 18 0: OK 1: Fault
OK/Fault on No Top 19 0: Fault 1: OK
Top Load Occurrence Destination 20
Top Load Occurrence Relay Y/N 21 1: Enable 0:Disable

 Top load Sensor/Given distance


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 9: Top load Sensor/Given distance
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: End Program 0: Disable
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay number 2 Relay number
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay number 4
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay
6
number
Sensor Fault of Upper(OUT)Relay
7 1: Enable 0:Disable
Y/N
Sensor Fault of Lower(OUT)Relay
8
number
Sensor Fault of Lower(OUT)Relay
9 1: Enable 0:Disable
Y/N
10 Register number
Reg. Num of Top Load(OUT)
11 Bit width

Functions 132 Electro Press JP-S


Item
Item Setting Range
number
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Top Pos. (OUT)
13 Bit width
Sampling Begin Pos. 14 Model (Position)
Sampling End Pos. 15 Model (Position)
Upper Lim. Load of Top 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of Top 17 Model (Load)
OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area 18 0: OK 1: Fault
OK/Fault on No Top 19 0: Fault 1: OK
Top Load Occurrence Destination 20
Top Load Occurrence Relay Y/N 21 1: Enable 0:Disable

 Valley load Sensor/Given position


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 10: Valley load Sensor/Given position
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: End Program 0: Disable
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay number 2 Relay number
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay number 4
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay
6
number
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay
7 1: Enable 0:Disable
Y/N
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) Relay
8
number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) Relay
9 1: Enable 0:Disable
Y/N
Reg. Num of Valley Load (OUT) 10 Register number
Register number 11 Bit width
Reg. Num of Valley Pos. (OUT) 12 Register number
Register number 13 Bit width
Sampling Start Pos. 14 Model (Position)
Sampling End Pos. 15 Model (Position)
Upper Lim. Load of Valley 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of Valley 17 Model (Load)
OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area 18 0: OK 1: Fault
OK/Fault on No Valley 19 0: Fault 1: OK
Valley Load Occurrence Destination 20
Valley Load Occurrence Relay Y/N 21 1: Enable 0:Disable

Functions 133 Electro Press JP-S


 Valley load Sensor/Given distance
Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 11: Valley load Sensor/Given distance
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: End Program 0: Disable
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay number 2 Relay number
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay number 4
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper(OUT)Relay
6
number
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay
7 1: Enable 0:Disable
Y/N
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) Relay
8
number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) Relay
9 1: Enable 0:Disable
Y/N
Reg. Num of Valley Load (OUT) 10 Register number
11 Bit width
Reg. Num of Valley Pos. (OUT) 12 Register number
13 Bit width
Sampling Start Position 14 Model (Position)
Sampling End Position 15 Model (Position)
Upper Lim. Load of Valley 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of Valley 17 Model (Load)
OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area 18 0: OK 1: Fault
OK/Fault on No Valley 19 0: Fault 1: OK
Valley Load Occurrence Destination 20
Valley Load Occurrence Relay Y/N 21 1: Enable 0:Disable

 Peak to peak Sensor/Given position


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 12: Peak to peak Sensor/Given position
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: End Program 0: Disable
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay number 2 Relay number
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay
4
number
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay
6
number
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay
7 1: Enable 0:Disable
Y/N
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT)
8
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT)
9 1: Enable 0:Disable
Relay Y/N

Functions 134 Electro Press JP-S


Item
Item Setting Range
number
10 Register number
Reg. Num of P-P Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
Sampling Start Pos. 12 Model (Position)
Sampling End Pos. 13 Model (Position)
Upper Lim. Load of P-P 14 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of P-P 15 Model (Load)
OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area 16 0: OK 1: Fault

 Peak to peak Sensor/Given distance


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 13: Peak to peak Sensor/Given distance
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: End Program 0: Disable
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay number 2 Relay number
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay number 4
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay
6
number
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) 1: Enable 0:Disable
7
Relay Y/N
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT)
8
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) 1: Enable 0:Disable
9
Relay Y/N
Reg. Num of P-P Load (OUT) 10 Register number
Register number 11 Bit width
Sampling Start Pos. 12 Model (Position)
Sampling End Pos. 13 Model (Position)
Upper Lim. Load of P-P 14 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of P-P 15 Model (Load)
OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area 16 0: OK 1: Fault

Functions 135 Electro Press JP-S


 DIF1 Sensor/Given Pos.
Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 14: DIF1 Sensor/Given Pos.
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: End Program 0: Disable
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay number 2 Relay number
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay number 4
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) 6
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) 7
1: Enable 0:Disable
Relay Y/N
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) 8
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) 9
1: Enable 0:Disable
Relay Y/N
Reg. Num of DIF Load (OUT) 10 Register number
11 Bit width
Reg. Num of DIF Pos. (OUT) 12 Register number
13 Bit width
Sampling Start Pos. 14 Model (Position)
Sampling End Pos. 15 Model (Position)
Upper Lim. Load of DIF1 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of DIF1 17 Model(Load)
Slant Value 18 -999999 – 999999 N/s
OK/Fault when Out of Sen.
19 0: OK 1: Fault
Area
OK/Fault on No DIF 20 0: Fault 1: OK
DIF 1 Occurrence Destination 21
DIF 1 Occurrence Relay Y/N 22 1: Enable 0:Disable

 DIF1 Sensor/Given dis.


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 15: DIF1 Sensor/Given dis.
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: End Program 0: Disable
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay number 2 Relay number
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay number 4
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT)Relay
6
number
Sensor Fault of Upper
7 1: Enable 0:Disable
(OUT)Relay Y/N
Sensor Fault of Lower
8
(OUT)Relay number
Sensor Fault of Lower
9 1: Enable 0:Disable
(OUT)Relay Y/N

Functions 136 Electro Press JP-S


Item
Item Setting Range
number
10 Register number
Reg. Num of DIF Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of DIF Pos. (OUT)
13 Bit width
Sampling Start Pos. 14 Model (Position)
Sampling End Pos. 15 Model (Position)
Upper Lim. Load of DIF1 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of DIF1 17 Model (Load)
Slant Value 18 -999999 – 999999 N/s
OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area 19 0: OK 1: Fault
OK/Fault on No DIF 20 0: Fault 1: OK
DIF 1 Occurrence Destination 21
DIF 1 Occurrence Relay Y/N 22 1: Enable 0:Disable
Set Start Value
23 0: Step Start Pos. 1: Ref. Register
(under development)
Set Start Value Register 24 Register number
(under development) 25 Bit width

 DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 16: DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: End Program 0: Disable
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay
2 Relay number
number
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay number 4
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT)
6
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT)
7 1: Enable 0:Disable
Relay Y/N
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT)
8
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT)
9 1: Enable 0:Disable
Relay Y/N
10 Register number
Reg. Num of DIF Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of DIF Pos. (OUT)
13 Bit width
Sampling Start Pos. 14 Model (Position)
Sampling End Pos. 15 Model (Position)
Upper Lim. Load of DIF2 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of DIF2 17 Model (Load)
Slant Value 18 -999999 – 999999 N/mm
OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area 19 0: OK 1: Fault

Functions 137 Electro Press JP-S


Item
Item Setting Range
number
OK/Fault on No DIF 20 0: Fault 1: OK
DIF 2 Occurrence Destination 21
DIF 2 Occurrence Relay Y/N 22 1: Enable 0:Disable

 DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.


Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 17: DIF2 Sensor/Given dis.
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: End Program 0: Disable
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay number 2 Relay number
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay number 4
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT)
6
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT)
7 1: Enable 0:Disable
Relay Y/N
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT)
8
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT)
9 1: Enable 0:Disable
Relay Y/N
Reg. Num of DIF Load (OUT) 10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of DIF Pos. (OUT)
13 Bit width
Sampling Start Pos. 14 Model (Position)
Sampling End Pos. 15 Model (Position)
Upper Lim. Load of DIF2 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of DIF2 17 Model (Load)
Slant Value 18 -999999 – 999999 N/mm
OK/Fault when Out of Sen.
19 0: OK 1: Fault
Area
OK/Fault on No DIF 20 0: OK 1: Fault
DIF 2 Occurrence Destination 21
DIF 2 Occurrence Relay Y/N 22 1: Enable 0:Disable
Set Distance Start Pos.
23 0: Step Start Pos. 1: Ref. Register
(under development)
Set Reg. Num of Distance Start 24 Register number
Pos.
(under development) 25 Bit width

Functions 138 Electro Press JP-S


 Position Sensor (End Steps)
Item
Item Setting Range
number
Sensor type 0 23: Position Sensor (End Steps)
Action on Sensor Fault 1 1: Program end 0:Disable
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay number 2 Relay number
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay number 4
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 0:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT)
6
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT)
7 1: Enable 0:Disable
Relay Y/N
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT)
8
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT)
9 1: Enable 0:Disable
Relay Y/N
10 Register number
Reg. Num of DIF Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of DIF Pos. (OUT)
13 Bit width
Upper Limit Sensor Position 14 Model (Position)
Lower Limit Sensor Position 15 Model (Position)

 1000H: Save Set Data (Write to FROM)


This command is to write to FROM (Flash ROM) the result of adding/deleting program, adding/deleting
step or adding/deleting step judge.
Each data is modified in work area and the data on the work area will be deleted if the control power
supply is turned off. Be sure to write the modified data to FROM.
Set all the registers other than “Input top+1” as 0.

Functions 139 Electro Press JP-S


5. DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT (DIO)

There are 17 input and 16 output photo coupler digital input/outputs (optional). From this point onwards,
these will be referred to as “DIO”. DIO are factory options, and can be selected from the following 3
types (including “none”).
• 0: None
• N: NPN Specifications (Sink Input/Output Specifications)
• P: PNP Specifications (Source input/output specifications)

5.1 Digital Input/Output (DIO)Connectors


The connector shapes are the same for NPN specification and PNP specification devices.

To use the digital input/output, the following connectors need to be assembled, or the following cables
need to be used.

 DIO Connector

Connector: DC-37PF-N (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry Ltd. (JAE))


Shell: DC-C8-J13-F2-1R (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry Ltd. (JAE))

Functions 140 Electro Press JP-S


 DIO Cable

JANOME Order No.:140567007 (2m), 140567100 (3m), 140567203 (5m)


Refer to “DIO Cable Insulation Colors List” on the next page for the insulation color.

 Digital Input/Output (DIO) Connector Figure

19 1

37 20

Photo coupler output is used for the output. Use 100mA or less (when DC24V is used) per pin.

 DIO Connector Pin Assignment


Address Address
Pin No Name Pin No Name
(Relay number) (Relay number)
COM+(DC24 20 DOUT3 0702
1 -
V) 21 DOUT4 0703
2 DIN1 0000 22 DOUT5 0704
3 DIN2 0001 23 DOUT6 0705
4 DIN3 0002 24 DOUT7 0706
5 DIN4 0003 25 DOUT8 0707
6 DIN5 0004 26 DOUT9 0708
7 DIN6 0005 27 DOUT10 0709
8 DIN7 0006 28 DOUT11 070A
9 DIN8 0007 29 DOUT12 070B
10 DIN9 0008 30 DOUT13 070C
11 DIN10 0009 31 DOUT14 070D
12 DIN11 000A 32 DOUT15 070E
13 DIN12 000B 33 DOUT16 070F
14 DIN13 000C 34 DIN17 0010
15 DIN14 000D 35 COM-(GND) -
16 DIN15 000E 36 COM-(GND) -
17 DIN16 000F 37 COM-(GND) -
18 DOUT1 0700
19 DOUT2 0701

Functions 141 Electro Press JP-S


 DIO Cable Insulation Colors List

Insulation Spiral Insulation Spiral


Pin No. Pin No.
Color Mark Color Mark
1 Black 20 Black Blue
2 White 21 Red White
3 Red 22 Red Black
4 Green 23 Red Green
5 Yellow 24 Red Blue
6 Brown 25 Green White
7 Blue 26 Green Black
8 Gray 27 Green Red
9 Orange 28 Green Blue
10 Peach 29 Yellow White
11 Light Blue 30 Yellow Black
12 Purple 31 Yellow Red
13 White Black 32 Yellow Green
14 White Red 33 Yellow Blue
15 White Green 34 Brown White
16 White Blue 35 Brown Black
17 Black White 36 Brown Red
18 Black Red 37 Brown Green
19 Black Green

Functions 142 Electro Press JP-S


5.2 Digital Input/Output (DIO)Circuit
DIO, NPN Specifications (Sink Input/Output Specifications), Input Circuit

DIO 24V External


power supply

COM+
(DC24V)

2.2K
DIN1-
DIN17

DIO, NPN Specifications (Sink Input/Output Specifications), Output Circuit

DIO 24V External


power supply

DOUT1- +
DOUT16 External
- Device

COM-
(GND)

• Output capacity for 1 pin is 100mA or less (when DC24V is used)

Functions 143 Electro Press JP-S


DIO, PNP Specifications (Source Input/Output Specifications), Input Circuit

DIO 24V External


power supply

DIN1-
DIN17

2.2K COM-
(GND)

DIO, PNP Specifications (Source Input/Output Specifications), Output Circuit

24V External power supply

DIO

COM+
(DC24V)

+
DOUT1- External
DOUT16 - Device

• Output capacity for each pin is 100mA or less (when DC24V is used)

Functions 144 Electro Press JP-S


5.3 Digital Input/Output (DIO)Settings
Setting
Item Unit Function
Range/Selections
Presence of Digital
Valid/Invalid ― Is there a digital input/output?
Input/Output (DIO)
IO Software filter 5 / 10 / 20 / 50 msec IO Sampling Time Settings

This is an option for the Digital Input/Output (DIO) and Digital Input/Output should be set in the
software. If Digital Input/Output (DIO) is to be used, this setting must be set to “ON”. This will not
function correctly if “Off” is set.

Additionally, there is a function to adjust the sampling time (IO software filter). Set the sampling time
longer to reduce noise.

These settings are performed with the PC software (JP-S Designer). For details on the setting
procedure, refer to “4.1 Control by Relay/Register (IO Memory)”.

5.4 Digital Input/Output (DIO) Function Assignment


By assigning special relay and special register functions to the addresses (relay numbers), operating
start and status output can be performed from the Digital Input/Output (DIO).

There are no functions assigned when the press is shipped from the factory.
Refer to “4.1 Control by Relay/Register (IO Memory)”.

If assignment is made with “DIO 1” of “Automatic IO Assignment” in “Edit” menu of the PC


Software (JP-S Designer), functions will be assigned as follows.

Functions 145 Electro Press JP-S


Address
Function Name Pin No
(Relay number)
0000 Program Number – IN B0 DIN1 2
0001 Program Number – IN B1 DIN2 3
0002 Program Number – IN B2 DIN3 4
0003 Program Number – IN B3 DIN4 5
0004 Program Number – IN B4 DIN5 6
0005 Program Number – IN B5 DIN6 7
0006 Program Number – IN B6 DIN7 8
0007 Program Number Set – IN DIN8 9
0008 Return to Program Home Position – IN DIN9 10
0009 Program Run – IN DIN10 11
000A Probe - IN DIN11 12
000B ---- DIN12 13
000C ---- DIN13 14
000D Emergency Stop – IN DIN14 15
000E Return to Home Position – IN DIN15 16
000F Ram Free – IN DIN16 17
0010 Alarm Reset – IN DIN17 34
0700 Program Hold – OUT DOUT1 18
0701 Program Running – OUT DOUT2 19
0702 Approaching – OUT DOUT3 20
0703 Probing DOUT4 21
0704 Pressing DOUT5 22
0705 Pressing Hold Time – OUT DOUT6 23
0706 Sensor OK – OUT DOUT7 24
0707 Sensor Fault – OUT DOUT8 25
0708 Returning to Prog. Home Position – OUT DOUT9 26
0709 ---- DOUT10 27
070A Ram Drive Power Supply – OUT DOUT11 28
070B Returning to Home Position – OUT DOUT12 29
070C Returned to Home Position – OUT DOUT13 30
070D Pressing OK – OUT DOUT14 31
070E Alarm – OUT DOUT15 32
070F Program Number Set ACK – OUT DOUT16 33

For example, consider performing return to home position from the Digital Input/Output (DIO).
Four functions related to “Return to Home Position” are assigned to relay number corresponding digital
input/output. If assigned, operation can be executed or status can be read with signals of digital
input/output.
Assignment example is shown below.

Address
Function Name
(Relay number)
070A State of Ram Driving Power – OUT DOUT11
000E Return to Home Position – IN DIN15
070B Returning to Home Position – OUT DOUT12
070C Returned to Home Position – OUT DOUT13

Functions 146 Electro Press JP-S


OUT is a signal from JP-S and IN is a signal from an external device to JP-S.
By inputting assigned signals according to the following timing chart, the return to home position
operation can be performed.

Control Power

Drive Power

State of Ram DOUT11


Driving Power
Return to Home DIN15
Position
Return to Home DOUT12
Position
Returned to Home DOUT13
Position

For details on the assignment function, see “Functions 4.2 Special Relay/Special Register”.

Functions 147 Electro Press JP-S


6. FIELDBUS

The four types of fieldbus are “DeviceNet”, “PROFIBUS”, “CC-Link”, and “CC-Link (J)”. The type of
connector differs depending on the type of fieldbus.

6.1 Fieldbus Overview


There are software settings for the presence of and type of fieldbus in the options. In order to use the
fieldbus, the type of fieldbus needs to be set correctly.

The amount of input/output used for the fieldbus needs to be set. Set the number of input words and
output words.

Additional settings are required depending on the type of fieldbus. See the explanations for each type
of fieldbus.

To use fieldbus communication, always turn the receiver power on first.


The Fieldbus communication will be failed when turning JP-S power on first since the internal
processing of communication module will not execute.

Fieldbus
connector

Functions 148 Electro Press JP-S


6.2 DeviceNet
 Device Net Connector Diagram

1 5

 DeviceNet Pin Assignment

Pin No. Name Function


1 V- Bus Power Earth
2 CAN_L Communication Data Low (CAN Bus Line L)
3 SHIELD Shield Earth
4 CAN_H Communication Data High (CAN Bus Line H)
5 V+ Bus Power Supply (24V)

• Connector
Manufacturer: Phoenix Contact
Model Name: TMSTBP 2.5/5-ST5.08
Connector is included. Please prepare the cable yourself.

 EDS File
EDS File is a text file including device features and composition option. If required, download the EDS
file to the master unit.
To use the EDS File, use the EDS File in the operation manual CD or download the latest EDS File
from the internet cite of HMS, the manufacturer of Anybus Compact Com.

Name File Name


DeviceNet Setting File ABCC_DEC_V_2_3_JM110705.EDS

There are 2 status LEDs on the module.


Network Status Module Status
LED LED

Functions 149 Electro Press JP-S


 Network Status
Condition Details
OFF Offline, or power is not being supplied
Lit green Online, communication connected
Flashing green (1Hz) Online, communication disconnected
Lit red Communication cannot be performed
Flashing red (1Hz) Communication timeout
Alternating between
Self-test
red/green

 Module Status
Condition Details
OFF Power is not being supplied
Lit green Normal communication is being performed
Flashing green (1Hz) Settings are incorrect
Lit red Critical failure
Recoverable failure, recovery possible by changing settings
Flashing red (1Hz)
etc.
Alternating between
Self-test
red/green

 DeviceNet Settings
Setting
Setting Items Function
Range/Selections
Type of fieldbus connecting the main unit and external
Type of Fieldbus Device Net
device
The Node addresses can be set between 0-63. The
DeviceNet slave is classified from the Node addresses.
Node addresses 0-63
When multiple slaves are connected, select and set an
empty Node addresses.
The Baudrate can be selected and set from
Auto/125kbps/250kbps/500kbps. Set to match the
Auto/125/
Baudrate Baudrate of the network to be used. When Auto is
250/500
selected, communication will be automatically set to the
master Baudrate.
The number of input words is the amount of input data
(external PLC writes (sends), press reads (receives)).
Set the number of words for the required data amount (1
words is 2 bytes). For DeviceNet, a maximum of 126
0-126
No. of input words words can be set.
(DeviceNet)
Please note that as the amount of communication data
increases, the amount of time required for
communication increases, and the responsiveness
decreases.
The number of output words is the amount of output data
(press writes (sends), PLC reads (receives)). Set the
number of words for the required data amount (1 words
0-126 is 2 bytes). A maximum of 126 words can be set. Please
No. of output words
(DeviceNet) note that as the amount of communication data
increases, the amount of time required for
communication increases, and the responsiveness
decreases.

Functions 150 Electro Press JP-S


These settings are performed with the PC software JP-S Designer.

Start “JP-S Designer”.


Select [Fieldbus] in the tree view (see the above) of the main menu.
Set [Fieldbus type] as [DeviceNet].
Set [Node addresses], [Baudrate], [No. of input words] and [No. of output words].
Click [Press (P)] → [Send Data (S)] to send the set data to the controller. Note that the other data such
as set parameters and program will be also sent. Turn on the power again and the setting will be valid.
Refer to the Operation Manual (PC Operation) “5. JP-S Designer” for usage of “JP-S Designer”.

The DeviceNet is assigned to the IO memory addresses shown in the table below.

Address
No. of Words Relay Register Function
number Number
Input Max 1000 – Domain that corresponds to the DeviceNet input
100 – 17D
126 Words 17DF (external PLC writes, press reads).
Output Max 1800 – Domain that corresponds to the DeviceNet output (press
180 – 1FD
126 Words 1FDF writes, external PLC reads).

By assigning the functions of special relays/special registers to these addresses, operation start and
status reading can be performed from the external PLC.

For details on the assignment function, see “Functions 4.2 Special Relay/Special Register”.
In DeviceNet, two-word (32 bit) data is assigned on two consecutive registers.

Functions 151 Electro Press JP-S


For example, if the current position (monitor output function) is assigned on registers 180H and
181H (fieldbus output area), the following output date is received.

Current position: 100 mm


Register 180H 86A0H
100.000 → 186A0H (100000)
Register 181H 0001H Assigned shown to the left

Numerical data is assigned in order of upper and lower levels.

6.3 PROFIBUS
 PROFIBUS Connector Diagram

5 1

9 6

 PROFIBUS Pin Assignment

Pin No. Name Function


1 NC Not connected
2 NC Not connected
3 B Line RS485 RxD/TxD (+)
4 RTS Send Request
5 GND Bus Bus Earth
6 5V Bus Output 5V Bus Power Output
7 NC Not connected
8 A Line RS485 RxD/TxD (-)
9 NC Not connected
Housing Cable Shield Shield Earth

Functions 152 Electro Press JP-S


 GSD File
GSD File is a text file including device features and composition option. If required, download the
GSD file to the master unit.
To use the GSD File, use the GSD File in the operation manual CD-ROM or download the latest
GSD File from the internet cite of HMS, the manufacturer of Anybus Compact Com.

Name File Name


Profibus Setting File HMSA1812_JM110705.gsd

There are 2 status LEDs on the module.


The LEDs show the following status.

Data exchange Profibus module front LED


Condition
Y/N OP ST
Enable Normal Lit (green) Lit (green)
Disable Node addresses do not match Off Lit (green)
Disable Master/slave address overlap Off Lit (green)
No of input/output words do not
Disable Lit (red) Lit (green)
match

 PROFIBUS Setting
Item Range/Option Function
Type of fieldbus connecting the main unit and external
Type of fieldbus Profibus
device
Node addresses can be selected between 0 and 125.
Node addresses 0 – 125 Slave Node addresses are differentiated. Set slaves to
free Node addresses.
No. of input words is volume of input data written (sent) by
external PLC and to be read (received) by the Electro
0 – 64 in total
Press. Set the necessary data value in amount of word (1
No. of input words for input and
word = 2 bytes). In Profibus, up to 64 words in total for
output
input and output can be set. If the data is more volume, it
takes longer to send.
No. of output words is volume of output data written (sent)
by the Electro Press and to be read (received) by external
0 – 64 in total
PLC. Set the necessary data value in amount of word (1
No. of output words for input and
word = 2 bytes).
output
In Profibus, up to 64 words in total for input and output can
be set. If the data is more volume, it takes longer to send.

Functions 153 Electro Press JP-S


These settings are performed with the PC software JP-S Designer.

Start “JP-S Designer”.


Select [Fieldbus] in the tree view (see the above) of the main menu. Set [Fieldbus type] as [Profibus].
Set [Node Addresses], [No. of input words] and [No. of output words].
Click [Press (P)] → [Send Data (S)] to send the set data to the controller. Note that the other data such
as set parameters and program will be also sent. Turn on the power again and the setting will be valid.
Refer to the Operation Manual (PC Operation) “5. JP-S Designer” for usage of “JP-S Designer”.

The Profibus is assigned to the IO memory addresses shown in the table below.

Address
No. of Words Relay Register Function
number Number
Input Max 1000 – 100 – 13F Domain that corresponds to the Profibus input (external
64 Words 13FF PLC writes, press reads).
Output Max 1800 - 180 – 1BF Domain that corresponds to the Profibus output (press
64Words 1BFF writes, external PLC reads).

By assigning the functions of special relays/special registers to these addresses, operation start and
status reading can be performed from the external PLC.
For details on the assignment function, see “Functions 4.2 Special Relay/Special Register”.

In Profibus, two-word (32 bit) data is assigned on two consecutive registers.

Functions 154 Electro Press JP-S


For example, if the current position (monitor output function) is assigned on registers 180H and
181H (fieldbus output area), the following output date is received.

Current position: 100 mm


Register 180H 86A0H
100.000 → 186A0H (100000)
Register 181H 0001H Assigned shown to the left

Numerical data is assigned in order of upper and lower levels.

6.4 CC-Link
 CC-Link Connector Diagram

1 5

 CC-Link Pin Assignment

Pin No. Name Function


1 DA RS485 RxD/TxD(+)
2 DB RS485 RxD/TxD(-)
3 DG Signal Earth
4 SLD Shield Earth
5 FG Frame Earth

NOTE
• The CC-Link is a remote device station.
• Do not use the final number of output word area which is occupied by the system.
• When connecting a CC-Link, an upper controller (Master unit) should be ready for use.

Functions 155 Electro Press JP-S


 CSP File
CSP File is a text file including device features and composition option. If required, download the CPS
File to the master unit.
To use the CPS File, use the CPS File in the operation manual CD-ROM or download the latest CPS
File from the internet cite of HMS, the manufacturer of Anybus Compact Com.

Name File Name


Profibus Setting File (for 1 channel) HMS-ABCC_CCL_1_JM110705.csp
Profibus Setting File (for 2 channel) HMS-ABCC_CCL_2_JM110705.csp
Profibus Setting File (for 3 channel) HMS-ABCC_CCL_3_JM110705.csp
Profibus Setting File (for 4 channel) HMS-ABCC_CCL_4_JM110705.csp

Performance of the CSP File in the instruction CD-ROM has not been confirmed. Note that
performance is not guaranteed.

Each CSP File for number of channels (1-4) is available.

Example
To set number of channel as 4

Slave (JP-S) side/set number of channel = 4

Match number of channel

CPS File to be downloaded to the master unit: HMS-ABCC_CCL_4_JM110705.cspp

There are 2 status LEDs on the module.


The LEDs show the following status.

Configuration setting
(Correspondence between CC-Link module front LED
master/slave setting)
Data exchange No. of Node Extended cyclic
RUN ERR
Y/N addresses setting
Enable Match Match Lit Off
Disable Match Not match Lit Off
Disable Not match Match Off Off
Disable Not match Not match Off Off

Functions 156 Electro Press JP-S


 CC-Link Setting
Item Range/Option Function
Type of fieldbus connecting the main
Type of fieldbus CC-Link
unit and external device
Node addresses can be selected
between 1 and 64.
Remote Node addresses of CC-Link
Node addresses 1 – 64
are differentiated for Node addresses
number. Set plural remote Node
addresses to free Node addresses.
If Baudrate is increased, maximum
156kbps transmission distance will be shortened.
625kbps • 156kbps 1200m
Baudrate 2.5Mbps • 625kbps 900m
5Mbps • 2.5Mbps 400m
10Mbps • 5Mbps 160m
• 10Mbps 100m
Ver1 Applicable to Ver 1 and Ver 2 of
CC-Link Ver number
Ver2 CC-Link
No. of Node addresses1 –
Extended cyclic setting1
No. of Node addresses2 –
Extended cyclic setting1
No. of Node addresses3 –
Extended cyclic setting1
Number of input words and number of
No. of Node addresses4 –
Number of Node output words are fixed according to
Extended cyclic setting1
addresses (Number number of Node addresses and
No. of Node addresses1 –
of input/output) extended cyclic setting as per the
Extended cyclic setting2 (Ver 2)
following table.
No. of Node addresses2 –
Extended cyclic setting2 (Ver 2)
No. of Node addresses1 –
Extended cyclic setting4 (Ver 2)
No. of Node addresses1 –
Extended cyclic setting3 (Ver 2)

 Number of Node addresses (Input/Output assignment)


According to the combination of number of Node addresses and extended cyclic setting, you can
select from eight items below.

• Number of Node addresses 1 – Extended cyclic setting 1


IO memory address for the Press
Point
Register number Relay number
Input data 4 100 – 103 ―
Input IO 16 ― 1400 – 140F
Output data 3 180 – 182 ―
Output IO 16 ― 1C00 – 1C0F

Functions 157 Electro Press JP-S


• Number of Node addresses 2 – Extended cyclic setting 1
IO memory address for the Press
Point
Register number Relay number
Input data 8 100 – 107 ―
Input IO 32 ― 1400 – 141F
Output data 7 180 – 186 ―
Output IO 32 ― 1C00 – 1C1F

• Number of Node addresses 3 – Extended cyclic setting 1


IO memory address for the Press
Point
Register number Relay number
Input data 12 100 – 10B ―
Input IO 48 ― 1400 – 142F
Output data 11 180 – 18B ―
Output IO 48 ― 1C00 – 1C2F

• Number of Node addresses 4 – Extended cyclic setting 1


IO memory address for the Press
Point
Register number Relay number
Input data 16 100 – 10F ―
Input IO 64 ― 1400 – 143F
Output data 15 180 – 18E ―
Output IO 64 ― 1C00 – 1C3F

• Number of Node addresses 1 – Extended cyclic setting 2


IO memory address for the Press
Point
Register number Relay number
Input data 8 100 – 107 ―
Input IO 16 ― 1400 – 140F
Output data 7 180 – 186 ―
Output IO 16 ― 1C00 – 1C0F

• Number of Node addresses 2 – Extended cyclic setting 2


IO memory address for the Press
Point
Register number Relay number
Input data 16 100 – 10F ―
Input IO 48 ― 1400 – 142F
Output data 15 180 – 18E ―
Output IO 48 ― 1C00 – 1C2F

Functions 158 Electro Press JP-S


• Number of Node addresses 1 – Extended cyclic setting 4
IO memory address for the Press
Point
Register number Relay number
Input data 16 100 – 10F ―
Input IO 32 ― 1400 – 141F
Output data 15 180 – 18E ―
Output IO 32 ― 1C00 – 1C1F

• Number of Node addresses 1 – Extended cyclic setting 3


IO memory address for the Press
Point
Register number Relay number
Input data 32 100 – 11F ―
Input IO 64 ― 1400 – 143F
Output data 31 180 – 19E ―
Output IO 64 ― 1C00 – 1C3F

NOTE
• The number of output data is one less than the number of input data.

Output Data Input Data

Initial output+0 Initial input +0


Initial output+1 Data update area Initial input +1
(Write area) Data update area
… …
(Read area)
Initial output +z-2 Initial output +z-2
Initial output +z-1 System area Initial output +z-1

NOTE
• “Z” indicates the maximum number of words in the word area (Output/input).
• The system area cannot be used.

• The number of input words is the amount of input data (external PLC writes (sends), press reads
(receives)).

• The number of output words is the amount of output data (press writes (sends), PLC reads
(receives)).

• Set the number of words for the required data amount (1 word is 2 bytes).

Functions 159 Electro Press JP-S


Upper controller Electro Press
Master channel Slave channel

Output 001 Register100 Input area


Output 002 Register101
Output area
Output 003 Register102
Output 004 Register103
Output 001 Register180 Output area
Output 002 Register181
Input area
Output 003 Register182
Output 004 System Area Register183

These settings are performed with the PC software JP-S Designer.

Start “JP-S Designer”.


Select [Fieldbus] in the tree view (see the above) of the main menu.
Set [Fieldbus type] as [CC-Link].
Set [Node addresses], [Baudrate], [CC-Link Ver No.], [Occupied Node Numbers (I/O Numbers)].
Click [Press (P)]  [Send Data (S)] to send the set data to the controller. Note that the other data such
as set parameters and program will be also sent. Turn on the power again and the setting will be valid.
Refer to the Operation Manual (PC Operation) “5. JP-S Designer” for usage of “JP-S Designer”.

By assigning the functions of special relays/special registers to these addresses, operation start and
status reading can be performed from the external PLC.
For details on the assignment function, see “Functions 4.2 Special Relay/Special Register”.

Functions 160 Electro Press JP-S


In CC-Link, two-word (32 bit) data is assigned on two consecutive registers.

For example, if the current position (monitor output function) is assigned on registers 180H and 181H
(fieldbus output area), the following output date is received.

Register 180H 86A0H Current position: 100 mm


100.000  186A0H (100000)
Register 181H 0001H Assigned shown to the left

Numerical data is assigned in order of upper and lower levels.

6.5 CC-Link (J)


This is not the standard CC-Link. You can set more points of input/output data as abbreviating for
input/output IO.

 CC-Link(J) Connector Diagram

1 5

 CC-Link(J) Pin Assignment


Pin No. Name Function
1 DA RS485 RxD/TxD (+)
2 DB RS485 RxD/TxD (-)
3 DG Signal Earth
4 SLD Shield Earth
5 FG Frame Earth

NOTE
• CC-Link remote input/output function cannot be used.
• The CC-Link(J) is a remote device station.
• Do not use the final number of output word area which is occupied by the system.
• When connecting a CC-Link(J), an upper controller (Master unit) should be ready for use.

Functions 161 Electro Press JP-S


 CSP File
Refer to “6.4 CC-Link.”

 CC-Link(J) Setting
Item Range/Option Function
Type of fieldbus connecting the main unit and
Type of fieldbus CC-Link(J)
external device
Node addresses can be selected between 1 and 64.
Remote Node addresses of CC-Link are
Node addresses 1 - 64
differentiated for Node addresses number. Set plural
remote Node addresses to free Node addresses.
If Baudrate is increased, maximum transmission
156kbps distance will be shortened.
625kbps 156kbps 1200m
Baudrate 2.5Mbps 625kbps 900m
5Mbps 2.5Mbps 400m
10Mbps 5Mbps 160m
10Mbps 100m
Ver1
CC-Link Ver number Applicable to Ver 1 and Ver 2 of CC-Link
Ver2
Number of Node
1–4
addresses Number of input words and number of output words
1, 2, 4, 8 (Ver 2) are fixed according to number of Node addresses
Extended cyclic Fixed as 1 (Ver 1) and extended cyclic setting as per the following table.

Number of input words, number of output words


Number of Extended cyclic setting
Node
1 2 3 8
addresses
1 4 8 16 32
2 8 16 32 64
3 12 24 48 96
4 16 32 64 127

NOTE
• The number of output words is one less than the number of input words

Output Area Input Area


Initial output+0 Initial input +0
Initial output+1 Data update area Initial input +1
Data update area
… (Write area) …
(Read area)
Initial output +z-2 Initial output +z-2
Initial output +z-1 System area Initial output +z-1

NOTE
• “Z” indicates the maximum number of words in the word area (Output/input).
• The system area cannot be used.

Functions 162 Electro Press JP-S


• The number of input words is the amount of input data (external PLC writes (sends), press reads
(receives)).

• The number of output words is the amount of output data (press writes (sends), PLC reads
(receives)).

• Set the number of words for the required data amount (1 word is 2 bytes).

 Example
Kind of channel: version 2 remote device channel
Number of channel: 1
Extended cyclic: 1
Number of input/output word: 4 (Number of effective input/output word is 3)

Upper controller Electro Press


Master Slave channel

Output 001 Register100 Input area


Output 002 Register101
Output area
Output 003 Register102
Output 004 Register103
Output 001 Register180 Output area
Output 002 Register181
Input area
Output 003 Register182
Output 004 System Area Register183

These settings are performed with the PC software.

Functions 163 Electro Press JP-S


Start “JP-S Designer”.
Select [Fieldbus] in the tree view (see the above) of the main menu.
Set [Fieldbus type] as [CC-Link(J)].
Set [Node addresses], [Baudrate], [CC-Link Ver No.], [Occupied Node Numbers] and [Extended Cyclic
Setting].
Click [Press (P)]  [Send Data (S)] to send the set data to the controller. Note that the other data such
as set parameters and program will be also sent. Turn on the power again and the setting will be valid.
Refer to the Operation Manual (PC Operation) “5. JP-S Designer” for usage of “JP-S Designer”.

The CC-Link(J) is assigned to the IO memory addresses shown in the table below.

Address
No. of Words Relay Register Function
number Number
Input Max 127 1000 – 100 – 17E Domain that corresponds to the CC-Link(J) input
Words 17EF (external PLC writes, press reads).
Output Max 1800 – 180 – 1FE Domain that corresponds to the CC-Link(J) output
127 Words 1FEF (press writes, external PLC reads).

By assigning the functions of special relays/special registers to these addresses, operation start and
status reading can be performed from the external PLC.
For details on the assignment function, see “Functions 4.2 Special Relay/Special Register”.

In CC-Link(J), two-word (32 bit) data is assigned on two consecutive registers.

For example, if the current position (monitor output function) is assigned on registers 180H and 181H
(CC-Link(J) output area), the following output date is received.

Register 180H 86A0H Current position: 100 mm


100.000 → 186A0H (100000)
Register 181H 0001H Assigned shown to the left

Numerical data is assigned in order of upper and lower levels.

Functions 164 Electro Press JP-S


7. ETHERNET

7.1 Ethernet Overview


The controller is equipped with Ethernet (10/100BASE-TX) as
standard.
The Ethernet connector is on the front of the controller.

Ethernet
The following functions can be used by transmitting and receiving
Connector
commands and data from a PC or external devices via Ethernet.

1. Access to relays/registers
2. Sending results data
3. Sending and receiving setting data
4. Rewriting of system programs
5. Setting of servo amp parameters (under development)

The function in 1 accesses relays/registers via the Ethernet to control the press, and the same function
and uses as the Digital Input/Output (DIO) can be performed. This function is called “Ethernet IO”.

Functions 2 to 5 require connection to a computer, and use computer software (JP-S SaS System).

Electro Press does not stop immediately after an emergency stop


Caution command executed when not using DIO network.

Functions 165 Electro Press JP-S


Ethernet hub enables you to establish a link between PC and several presses via Ethernet.

Connection Example
Hub

PC

Press 1 Press 2 Press 3

7.2 Ethernet Connector


 Ethernet Connector (ENET) Diagram RJ-45

8 1

 Ethernet Connector (ENET) Pin Assignment

Pin No. Name Function


1 TD+ Send signal +
2 TD- Send signal -
3 RD+ Receive signal +
4 NC Not connected
5 NC Not connected
6 RD- Receive signal -
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected

Functions 166 Electro Press JP-S


7.3 Communication Settings (IP Address Settings)
The JP-S Ethernet communication uses TCP/IP Protocol. For this reason, an IP address, subnet mask,
and default gateway need to be configured on the JP-S to enable Ethernet communication.
These configurations are performed using computer software (JP-S designer). JP-S Designer is
bundled in the Operating Manual CD. For details on how to use this software, see the “PC Operation”
operating manual.
IP address assignment can be made by PC via Ethernet or RC232C.

In order to assign IP address via Ethernet, the communication settings (TCP/IP Settings) on the
computer need to have been set. Take note of the following points on PC communication settings
(TCP/IP).
• In order to use the Ethernet function, a TCP/IP network environment is required.
• If a network currently exists, there is no need to configure the computer with a new IP address.
• As fixed IP addresses are used, do not use a DHCP server etc.
• To assign a new IP address to your computer, consult the network administrator.

 Assigning the JP-S IP Address


Start JP-S Designer. Click [Press]  [IP Address Setting Press] and select [Ethernet] or [RS232C].
Set the following 3 items.
• [IP Address]
• [Subnet Mask]
• [Default Gateway]

When the “Set” button is pressed, the IP address and other settings are assigned to the specified
press.
The IP address settings dialog is initially configured to perform settings for the press of the IP address
“192.168.200.180”, which is the default address of JP-S.
After having set the IP Address, press [Change] to change the IP Address, selecting the Electro Press.
If setting IP address, cannot set 0 and 255 in the right side (the fourth octet).
The new IP address and other details are reflected after the press is restarted.

The following values are set as default for the press IP address.
• IP Address: 192.168.200.180
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
• Default gateway: 0.0.0.0

Functions 167 Electro Press JP-S


7.4 Communication Specifications
This chapter explains the required communication specifications for performing controls and receiving
results data from an external device via the Ethernet.

Note: If you are using computer software (JP-S SaS System) to send setting data or receive results
data, there is no need to understand the contents of this chapter. The explanations here are only
required if you have created your own PC software, or are communicating from the PLC.

• Basic Communication Protocol


TCP/IP (IPv4)
• Upper Level Communication Protocol
Data Communication Protocol (described in each section of this manual)
The Electro Press (JP-S) operates as a server
Board number

Port number Function


10028 Receiving results data
10029 Ethernet IO (Control via access to Relay/Register)

• Means of Opening Connection


Connection is opened from client side
• Data Display Method
Binary Code
• Timeout: 10 sec
• Retry: None

In general, the byte order of multi-byte data transfer is big-endian.


However, the byte order of Position Data and Load Data (2 Words, (4 bytes, 32 bits)) has an
exceptional case.

In case of “Receiving Resut Data”, the byte order of Position Data and Load Data is big-endian.
In case of “Ethernet IP”, the byte order of Position Data and Load Data is little-endian.

Example: Position 86.240 mm 86240 = 000150E0H


Upper level: 0001H
Lower level: 50E0H

Functions 168 Electro Press JP-S


In Receiving Data, data is transferred in order of upper and lower levels.

N HEX Details
1 00 Upper level
2 01 0001H
3 50 Lower level
4 E0 50E0H

In Ethernet (read from register), registers are configured in order of lower and upper levels; and data is
transferred in the same order.

N HEX Details
1 50 Lower level
2 E0 50E0H
3 00 Upper level
4 01 0001H

7.5 Ethernet IO (Control via Access to Relay/Register)


Relay/registers (IO memory) can be accessed via the Ethernet to control JP-S. This function is called
“Ethernet IO”.

As Ethernet IO, an area of 128 word number (1 word = 2 bytes) is secured each for input (external
device writes, press reads) and (press writes, external device reads).

In order to use the Ethernet IO, firstly the following special relay/special register functions should be
assigned to Ethernet IO address. The IO memory addresses that can be used in Ethernet IO are as
shown below.

Address
No. of Words Relay Register Function
number Number
128 Word 2000 – Domain that corresponds to the Ethernet input (external
200 – 27F
Number 27FF device writes, press reads).
128 Word 2800 – Domain that corresponds to the Ethernet output (press
280 – 2FF
Number 2FFF writes, external device reads).
Data in the input area (2000H~27FFH) can be read from external device.

These settings are performed with the PC software. For details on the setting procedure, see the “PC
Operation” operating manual.

Functions 169 Electro Press JP-S


• Port Number
Port number for Ethernet IO (Control via access to Relay/Register)

Port Number Function


10029 Ethernet IO (Control via access to Relay/Register)

Electro Press (JP-S) acts as server.


In order to start communication, it is required to establish connection of board number 10029 for JP-S
IP Address. Establish connection from external device (PLC, PC, etc.) as client.

In case connection cannot be established, check cable (cross cable for direct connection, straight
cable via hub), IP Address of external device, subnet mask, default gateway and port number (10029).

The following values are set as default for the press IP address.
IP Address: 192.168.200.180
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: 0.0.0.0

7.5.1 Format for Sending & Receiving Data


Data formats used for communication through the Ethernet are shown in the diagram below.
The data has a communication byte number (2 bytes) and function code (2 bytes) at the head, and if
required has variable length data following the head.

communication Function Code Data (Variable length, multiple bytes of 2)


byte(s) number 2 bytes
2 bytes

No. of send bytes


MAX: 1024 bytes

Enter the total number of send text bytes in “No. of Send Bytes” (including communication byte number
itself). A maximum of 1024 bytes can be sent.
The function code is a code that displays this text function.

 Arrangement Method of Multibyte Data


Data of 2 or more bytes is arranged in order of upper and lower levels (big-endian).
For example, Acknowledge ACK (function code 0600H) does not have data, and the communication
byte number is 4 bytes. The actual communication text that is sent and received is as shown below.

Functions 170 Electro Press JP-S


 Communication text data example: Acknowledge

Communication
Function Code
byte number
00 04 06 00

Communication byte numbers and function codes are configured in order of upper and lower levels
(big endian).
In Ethernet IO, two-word (4 bytes, 32 bit) data is output in order of lower and upper levels.
For example, if the current position (monitor output function) is assigned on registers 180H and 181H
(Ethernet output area), the following output date is received.

Register 280H 86A0H Current position: 100 mm


100.000 → 186A0H (100000)
Register 281H 0001H Assigned shown to the left

Numerical data is assigned in order of upper and lower levels.

7.5.2 Data Send Procedure


 Relay/Register Read

Client Press
Client sends “IO Relay Read” command to the
IO Relay press.
Read
Normal Press receives the command, and sends a signal
0100H response
that has the IO relay data as a block.
0100H

IO data If the same client sends an “IO Data Read”


Read Normal
response command to the press, the press receives the
0101H
0101H command and sends the IO register data as data
that has a block.

Functions 171 Electro Press JP-S


 Relay/Register Write

Client Press
IO Relay Client sends the “IO Relay Write” command (with
Write Normal the details to be written to the data block) to the
0102H
response press. The press writes the received IO relay data,
0102H
and returns a normal response.
IO data The client sends the “IO Relay Write” command
Write Normal (with the details to be written to the data block) to the
0103H response
0103H press. The press writes the received IO relay data,
and returns a normal response.

7.5.3 Function Code


Function
Function Name Function
Code
Reads the IO relay state (ON/OFF) (Maximum 128 point
IO relay read 0100H
continuous)
IO register read 0101H IO register value read (Maximum 64 points continuous)
Value (ON/OFF) is written to IO relay (Maximum 128 point
IO Relay write 0102H
continuous)
IO register write 0103H Value is written to IO register (Maximum 64 point continuous)
IO relay read Process was not performed correctly for the IO relay read
8100H
abnormal response command
IO register read Process was not performed correctly for the IO register read
8101H
abnormal response command
IO Relay write Process was not performed correctly for the IO relay write
8102H
abnormal response command
IO register write Process was not performed correctly for the IO register write
8103H
abnormal response command

7.5.4 IO Relay Read


 Client  Press
IO relay data as many as the “Read point” from the top IO relay number is requested.

No. of
N Details
Bytes
1 2 No. of Communication Bytes (8)
3 2 Function Code (0100H)
5 2 Top IO Relay Number: 2000H~2FFFH
7 2 Read point: 1~128 (m)

Functions 172 Electro Press JP-S


 Press  Client
IO relay data as many as the “Read point” from the top IO relay number is output.

No. of
N Details
Bytes
1 2 No. of Communication Bytes
3 2 Function Code (0100H)
5 2 Top IO Relay Number : 2000H~2FFFH
7 2 IO Relay Data 1 B0-B16(See below)
9 2 IO Relay Data 2 B0-B16(See below)
….
2 IO Relay Data n B0-B16(See below)

 IO Relay Data Bit device storage sequence


The read IO relay status is stored in the sequence of lower level  upper level. Also, if the number of
read points is not a multiple of 16, the left over bits are 0.
Top IO relay number
0: OFF
1: ON

B1 B1 B13 B1 B1 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
Data 1



・ B1 B1 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
Data n

Read Points: m, number of data: n


n = m/16 (roundup)

Functions 173 Electro Press JP-S


7.5.5 IO Register Read (Read Numerical Type Data)
 Client  Press
IO register data as many as “Read register number” from the top IO register number is requested.

No. of
N Details
Bytes
1 2 No. of Communication Bytes (8)
3 2 Function Code (0101H)
5 2 Top IO Register Number: 200H~2FFH
7 2 Read register number: 1~64 (n)

 Press  Client
IO register data as many as “Read register number” from the top IO register number is output.

No. of
N Details
Bytes
1 2 No. of Communication Bytes
3 2 Function Code (0101H)
5 2 Top IO Register Number: 200H - 2FFH
7 2 Register data 1
9 2 Register data 2

2 Register data n

7.5.6 IO Relay Write


 Client  Press
IO relay data write as many as the “Read point” from the top IO relay number is requested.

No. of
N Details
Bytes
1 2 No. of Communication Bytes
3 2 Function Code (01020H)
5 2 Top IO Relay Number : 2000H - 27FFH
7 2 Write point: 1 - 128
9 2 IO Relay Data 1 B0-B16(See below)
11 2 IO Relay Data 2 B0-B16(See below)
・・・・
2 IO Relay Data n B0-B16(See below)

Functions 174 Electro Press JP-S


 IO Relay Data Bit device storage sequence
The read IO relay status is stored in the sequence of lower level  upper level. Also, if the number of
write points is not a multiple of 16, the left over bits are 0. Top IO relay number
0: OFF
1: ON

B15 B14 B13 B12 B1 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0


Data 1



・ B15 B14 B13 B12 B1 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

Data n

NOTE
• Always ensure that the specified write points match the data n number.
Write Points: m, number of data: n
n = m/16 (roundup)
For example, if there are 16 write points, set the data n number as 1 (word).

 Press  Client
If write was performed according to the client request, the top IO relay number and write points are
output.

N No. of Bytes Details


1 2 Byte(s)
3 2 Function code (0102H)
5 2 Top IO relay number
7 2 Write point: 1 – 128

Functions 175 Electro Press JP-S


7.5.7 IO Register Write (Numerical data write)
 Client  Press
IO relay data write as many as the “Write register number” from the top IO register number is
requested.

N No. of Bytes Details


1 2 No. of Communication Bytes
3 2 Function Code (0103H)
5 2 Top IO Register Number : 200H - 27FH
7 2 Write register number: 1 - 64 (n)
9 2 Register data 1
11 2 Register data 2

2 Register data n

 Press  Client
If write was performed according to the client request, the top IO relay number and write points are
output. (echo back)

N No. of Bytes Details


1 2 No. of Communication Bytes
3 2 Function Code (0103H)
5 2 Top IO Register Number : 200H-27FH
7 2 Write register number: 1 – 64 (n)

7.5.8 Abnormal Response


If each command is not processed normally, an abnormal response command is output from the press.

N No. of Bytes Details


1 2 No. of Communication Bytes (5)
3 2 Function Code (8100H – 8103H)
5 1 Abnormal Response Code (see below)

 Abnormal Response Code List

Abnormal
Response Error Name Error Details Example Fix
Code
Function code Unsupported function code is Check the press support function
01H
abnormality received by the press code, review the sent request text
Data Request text data section Review the request text data
02H
abnormality details are abnormal section

Functions 176 Electro Press JP-S


 Example:
• Client  Press, Read 80 IO relay numbers from 9800H
0008 0100 9800 0050
N HEX Details
1 00 No. of Communication Bytes
2 08 8
3 01 Function Code
4 00 0100H
5 98 Top IO Relay Number
6 00 9800H 9800H is not in Ethernet IO area.
7 00 Read register number
8 50 80 points (80 = 0050H) 80 = 16 * 5 (5 words)

• Press  Client, Data abnormality (Top IO Relay Number is out of the range)
0005 8100 02
N HEX Details
1 00 No. of Communication Bytes
2 05 5
3 81 Function Code
4 00 8100H
5 02 Abnormal Response Code 02H: Data abnormality

Functions 177 Electro Press JP-S


7.5.9 Ethernet IO (Examples)
An example of Ethernet IO communication is shown below
Register numbers are assigned as follows.
Relay/Register
Bit Details
Number
2000 1 Ram free - IN
2001 1 Home position – IN
2003 1 Set program number - in IN
2004 1 Move program home position – IN
2005 1 Start program - IN
2010 1 External, Position drive - IN
2011 1 External, Distance drive - IN
2012 1 External, Load drive - IN
2030 1 JOG1 up (-)- IN
2031 1 JOG1 down (+) IN
2040 1 Alarm reset – IN
210 32 Program number – IN
212 32 External, Driving speed – IN
214 32 External, End position – IN
216 32 External, End distance – IN
218 32 External, End load – INN
2800 1 Ram drive power supply status – OUT
2801 1 Returning to home position OUT
2802 1 Finished returning to home position - OUT
2804 1 Moving program home position – OUT
2805 1 Program standby – OUT
2806 1 Executing program – OUT
2810 1 External, driving – OUT
2820 1 Executing step number strobe
2830 1 JOG driving – OUT
2840 1 In alarm – OUT
2860 1 Program number set acknowledge – OUT
288 32 Program number - OUT
2900 1 Monitor data strobe – OUT
292 32 Current position – OUT
294 32 Current load - OUT
296 32 Monitor data number – OUT
2A0 32 Alarm, error number 1 – OUT
2A2 32 Alarm, error number 2 – OUT
2A4 32 Alarm, error number 3 – OUT
2A6 32 Alarm, error number 4 – OUT
2A8 32 Alarm, error number 5 – OUT
2AA 32 Alarm, error number 6 – OUT
2AC 32 Alarm, error number 7 – OUT
2AE 32 Alarm, error number 8 – OUT
2B0 32 Calendar, year - OUT
2B2 32 Calendar, month/day
2B4 32 Calendar, hour/minute

Functions 178 Electro Press JP-S


 Status Read (IO Relay Read Example)
The following table is an example to read the status of assignment of Ethernet IO.
Each relay shows output status.

Relay Number Bit Details Status


2800 1 Ram drive power supply status – OUT ON
2801 1 Returning to home position OUT OFF
2802 1 Finished returning to home position - OUT ON
2804 1 Moving program home position – OUT OFF
2805 1 Program standby – OUT ON
2806 1 Executing program – OUT OFF
2810 1 External, driving – OUT OFF
2830 1 JOG driving – OUT OFF
2840 1 In alarm – OUT OFF

• Client  Press, Read 80 IO register numbers from 2800H


0008 0100 2800 0050
N HEX Details
1 00 No. of Communication Bytes
2 08 8
3 01 Function Code
4 00 0100H Read IO register
5 28 Top IO Register Number
6 00 2800H
7 00 Read register number
8 50 80 points (80 = 0050H) 80 = 16 * 5 (5 words)

• Press  Client, Response 5-word data from 2800H


0010 0100 2800 0025 0000 0000 0000 0000
N HEX Details
1 00 No. of Communication Bytes
2 10 16 (16 = 0010H)
3 01 Function Code
4 00 0100H Read/respond IO register
5 28 Top IO Register Number
6 00 2800H
7 00 IO register data 1
8 25 2800, 2802, 2805 ON 00100101B = 25H
9 00
IO register data 2
10 00
11 00
IO register data 3
12 00
13 00
IO register data 4
14 00
15 00
IO register data 5
16 00

Functions 179 Electro Press JP-S


 Return to Home Position
Example of operation for the following assignment

Register Number Bit Details


2001 1 Return to home position – IN
2802 1 Returned to home position – OUT

Return to home position ON


• Client  Press, 2001H ON
000A 0102 2001 0001 0001
N HEX Details
1 00 No. of Communication Bytes
2 0A 10 = 000AH
3 01 Function Code
4 02 0102H Write IO register
5 20 Top IO Register Number
6 01 2800H
7 00 Write Register Number
8 01 1 point
9 00 IO Relay Data 1
Least significant bit ON
10 01
0000000000000001B = 0001H

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0102 2001 0001

Returned to home position ON (Check Register Number 2802H ON)


• Client  Press, 2800H Read IO Register Number 1
0008 0100 2802 0001

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0100 2802 0001

Functions 180 Electro Press JP-S


Return to home position OFF
• Client  Press, 2001H OFF
000A 0102 2001 0001 0000
N HEX Details
1 00 No. of Communication Bytes
2 0A 10 = 000AH
3 01 Function Code
4 02 0102H Write IO register
5 20 Top IO Register Number
6 01 2001H
7 00 Write Register Number
8 01 1 point
9 00 IO Register Data 1
Least significant bit OFF
10 00
0000000000000000B = 0000H

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0102 2001 0001

 Set Program Number, Start Program


Example of operation for the following assignment (Set program number)

Relay Number Bit Details


2003 1 Set program number - IN
210 32 Program number - IN
2860 1 Program number set acknowledge - OUT
288 32 Program number - OUT

Set program number - 5


• Client  Press, Register “5” to 210H and 211H
000C 0103 0210 0002 0005 0000
N HEX Details
1 00 No. of Communication Bytes
2 0C 12 = 000CH
3 01 Function Code
4 03 0103H Write IO register
5 02 Top IO Register Number
6 10 210H
7 00 Write register number
8 02 2 words (32 bit)
9 00 IO register data 1
10 05 0005 Lower level Two-word register is registered and transmitted
11 00 IO register data 2 in order of lower and upper levels.
12 00 0000 Upper level

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0103 0210 0002

Functions 181 Electro Press JP-S


Set program number - ON
• Client  Press, 2003H ON
000A 0102 2003 0001 0001
N HEX Details
1 00 No. of Communication Bytes
2 0A 10 = 000AH
3 01 Function Code
4 02 0102H Write IO relay
5 20 Top IO Relay Number
6 03 2003H
7 00 Write register number
8 01 1 point
9 00 IO reglay data 1
10 01 Least significant bit ON 0000000000000001B = 0001H

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0102 2003 0001

Set program number - OFF


• Client  Press, 2003H OFF
000A 0102 2003 0001 0000

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0102 2003 0001

Example of operation for the following assignment (Start program)

Relay Number Bit Details


2005 1 Start program - IN

Start program - ON
• Client  Press, 2005H ON
000A 0102 2001 0001 0001

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0102 2005 0001

Start program - OFF


• Client  Press, 2005H OFF
000A 0102 2005 0001 0000

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0102 2005 0001

Functions 182 Electro Press JP-S


 Monitoring Current Position and Current Load
Example of operation for the following assignment

Relay Number Bit Details


2900 1 Monitor data strobe – OUT
292 32 Current position – OUT
294 32 Current load - OUT
296 32 Monitor data number – OUT

Read each register


• Client  Press, Read 8-word data from 290H
0008 0101 0290 0008
N HEX Details
1 00 No. of Communication Bytes
2 08 8 = 0008H
3 01 Function Code
4 01 0101H Read IO register
5 02 Top IO Register Number
6 90 0290H
7 00 Read register number
8 08 8 words

• Press  Client, Read 8-word data from 290H


0016 0101 0290 0001 0000 3D3F 0001 0632 0000 009E 0000
N HEX Details
1 00 No. of Communication Bytes
2 16 22=0016H
3 01 Function Code
4 01 0101H Read IO register Response
5 02 Top IO Register Number
6 90 0290H
7 00 IO register data 1
8 01 0290H Least significant bit ON Monitor data strobe ON
9 00 IO register data 2
10 00 0291H
11 3D IO register data 3 00013D3FH = 81215
12 3F 0292H Current position Lower level Current position 81.215 mm
13 00 IO register data 4
14 01 0293H Current position Upper level
15 06 IO register data 5 00000632H = 1586
16 32 0294H Current position Lower level Current load 1586 N
17 00 IO register data 6
18 00 0295H Current position Upper level
19 00 IO register data 7 0000009EH = 158
20 9E 0296H Monitor data number Lower level
21 00 IO register data 8
22 00 0297H Monitor data number Upper level

Functions 183 Electro Press JP-S


7.5.10 Example of Programming Register via Ethernet IO
This example shows assignment of programming register as:
• Register number 210H for Input top
• Register number 290H for Output top
Register numbers are set as below.

 Input register
Register
Address Name Function
number
Input top+0 210 Execute command bit 0 OFF  ON Execute command
Input top+1 211 Command code 0000H: Add program
0001H: Delete program
0004H: Write program
0005H: Read program
0040H: Add program
0041H: Delete program
0044H: Write step data
0045H: Read step data
0060H: Add step judge
0061H: Delete step judge
0064H: Write step judge data
0065H: Read step judge data
1000H: Save set data
(Write to FROM)
Input top+2 212 ID1(Program number) Specify program number
Input top+3 213 ID2(Step number) Specify step number
Input top+4 214 ID3(Step number) Specify step judge number
Input top+5 215 Reserve system Reserve
Input top+6 216 Item number Specify item number
Input top+7 217 Reserve system Reserve
Input top+8 218 Data (lower) Lower word of write data
Input top+9 219 Data (upper) Upper word of write data

 Output register
Register
Address Name Function
number
Output top+0 290 Command executing bit0 Ready (0:Busy 1:Ready)
status bit1 Error (0:Normal 1:Error)
Output top+1 291 Error code 0: Normal
2: Command error
3: Add error
4: Delete error
5: Out of range of write data
6: Write error
7: Read error
8: Out of range of program number
9: Program run error
Output top+2 282 Data (lower) Lower word of read data
Output top+3 293 Data (upper) Upper word of read data

Functions 184 Electro Press JP-S


 Make an Additional Program Number 5
• Client  Press, Add program (0000H), Program number 5
001A 0103 0211 0009 0000 0005 0000 0000 0000 00010000 0000 0000
N HEX Details
1-2 001A Communication byte number 26=001AH
3-4 0103 Function code 0103H IO Write register
5-6 0211 Top IO Register number 211H
7-8 0009 Number of register written 9 words
9-10 0000 211 Command 0000H Add program
11-12 0005 212 Program number 5
13-14 0000 213 Step number 0
15-16 0000 214 Step judge number 0
17-18 0000 215 Reserve system 0
19-20 0001 216 Item number 1 Drive mode:Const. Speed/Stop at the set Pos.
21-22 0000 217 Reserve system 0
23-24 0000 218 Data (lower) 0
25-26 0000 219 Data (upper) 0

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0103 0211 0009

• Client  Press, 2100H ON (Execute command)


000A 0102 2100 0001 0001
N HEX Details
1-2 000A Communication byte number 10=000AH
3-4 0102 Function code 0102H IO Write relay
5-6 2100 Top IO Relay number 2100H
7-8 0001 No. of items written 1
9-10 0001 IO Relay data1 1 Lowest bit ON

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0102 2100 0001

Wait for 10msec or longer

• Client  Press, 2100H OFF


000A 0102 21000001 0000
N HEX Details
1-2 000A Communication byte number 10=000AH
3-4 0102 Function code 0102H IO Write relay
5-6 2100 Top IO Relay number 2100H
7-8 0001 No. of items written 1
9-10 0000 IO Relay data1 1 Lowest bit OFF

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0102 2100 0001

Functions 185 Electro Press JP-S


• Client  Press, Read 2 IO relays from 2900H
0008 0100 2900 0002
N HEX Details
1-2 0008 Communication byte number 8=0008H
3-4 0100 Function code 0100H IO Read relay
5-6 2900 Top IO Relay number 2900H
7-8 0002 No. of items read 2

• Press  Client, Read 2 IO relays from 2900H, Response


0008 0100 2900 0001
N HEX Details
1-2 0008 Communication byte number 8=0008H
3-4 0100 Function code 0100H IO Read relay
5-6 2900 Top IO Relay number 2900H
7-8 0001 IO Relay data1
Confirm Ready, Normal

 Program Number 5, Set Drive Stat Position as 75.000mm


• Client  Press, Write program data (0004H) Set Command
001A 0103 0211 0009 0004 0005 0000 0000 0000 0005 0000 24F8 0001
N HEX Details
1-2 001A Communication byte number 26=0001AH
3-4 0103 Function code 0103H IO Write register
5-6 0211 Top IO Register number 211H
7-8 0009 No. of register written 9 words
9-10 0004 211 Command 0004H Write program data
11-12 0005 212 Program number 5
13-14 0000 213 Step number 0
15-16 0000 214 Step judge number 0
17-18 0000 215 Reserve system 0
19-20 0005 216 Item number 5:Drive start position
21-22 0000 217 Reserve system 0
23-24 24F8 218 Data (lower) 24F8 75.000mm → 75000 = 000124F8H
25-26 0001 219 Data (upper) 0001

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0103 0211 0009

• Client  Press, 2100H ON (Execute command)


000A 0102 2100 0001 0001

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0102 2100 0001

Functions 186 Electro Press JP-S


Wait for 10msec or longer

• Client  Press, 2100H OFF


000A 0102 2100 0001 0000

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0102 2100 0001

• Client  Press, Read 2 IO relays from 2900H


0008 0100 2900 0002

• Press  Client, Read 2 IO relays from 2900H, Response


0008 0100 2900 0001
Confirm Ready, Normal

 Program Number 5, Step 1, Set Drive End Position as 80.000mm


• Client  Press, Program Number 5, Step 1. Drive End Position, Set Write Command
001A 0103 0211 0009 0044 0005 0001 0000 0000 0005 0000 3880 0001
N HEX Details
1-2 001A Communication byte number 26=001AH
3-4 0103 Function code 0103H IO Write register
5-6 0211 Top IO Register number 211H
7-8 0009 No. of register written 9 words
9-10 0044 211 Command 0044H Write step data
11-12 0005 212 Program number 5
13-14 0001 213 Step number 1
15-16 0000 214 Step judge number 0
17-18 0000 215 Reserve system 0
19-20 0005 216 Item number 5:Drive end position
21-22 0000 217 Reserve system 0
23-24 3880 218 Data (lower) 3880 80.000mm → 80000 = 00013880H
25-26 0001 219 Data (upper) 0001

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0103 0211 0009

• Client  Press, 2100H ON (Execute command)


000A 0102 2100 0001 0001

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0102 2100 0001

Functions 187 Electro Press JP-S


Wait for 10msec or longer

• Client  Press, 2100H OFF


000A 0102 2100 0001 0000

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0102 2100 0001

• Client  Press, Read 2 IO relays from 2900H


0008 0100 2900 0002

• Press  Client, Read 2 IO relays from 2900H, Response


0008 0100 2900 0001
Confirm Ready, Normal

 Save Data
• Client  Press, Set Save Data Command (1000H)
001A 0103 0211 0009 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
N HEX Details
1-2 001A Communication byte number 26=001AH
3-4 0103 Function code 0103H IO Write register
5-6 0211 Top IO Register number 211H
7-8 0009 No. of register written 9 words
9-10 1000 211 Command 1000H Save data
11-12 0000 212 Program number 0
13-14 0000 213 Step number 0
15-16 0000 214 Step judge number 0
17-18 0000 215 Reserve system 0
19-20 0000 216 Item number 0
21-22 0000 217 Reserve system 0
23-24 0000 218 Data (lower) 0
25-26 0001 219 Data (upper) 0

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0103 0211 0009

• Client  Press, 2100H ON (Execute command)


000A 0102 2100 0001 0001

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0102 2100 0001

Functions 188 Electro Press JP-S


Wait for 10msec or longer

• Client  Press, 2100H OFF


000A 0102 2100 0001 0000

• Press  Client, Response


0008 0102 2100 0001

• Client  Press, Read 2 IO relays from 2900H


0008 0100 2900 0002

• Press  Client, Read 2 IO relays from 2900H, Response


0008 0100 2900 0001
Confirm Ready, Normal

7.6 Result Data Transmission


Results data is backed up using the lithium battery, and saved in units of executed programs.
Backup domains are 490kbyte.
When the results data is extracted by transmission, it is automatically deleted.

Note) If you are using computer software (JP-S SaS System) to receive results data (JP-S Sampler),
there is no need to understand the contents of this chapter. The explanations here are only required if
you have created your own PC software, or are communicating from the PLC.

 Port number
Port number for access to Relay/Register (Ethernet IO)

Port number Function


10028 Sending results data

Electro Press (JP-S) acts as server.


In order to start communication, it is required to establish connection of board number 10028 for JP-S
IP Address. Establish connection from external device (PLC, PC, etc.) as client.

In case connection cannot be established, check cable (cross cable for direct connection, straight
cable via hub), IP Address of external device, subnet mask, default gateway and board number
(10028).

Functions 189 Electro Press JP-S


The following values are set as default for the press IP address.
• IP Address : 192.168.200.180
• Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
• Default gateway : 0.0.0.0

 Position data is described in long word (2 words, 4 bytes) in increments of 0.001 mm.
Data range: -999.999 mm – 999.999 mm
Binary indication: FFF0BDC1H – 000F423FH

 Load data is described in long word (2 words, 4 bytes) in increments of 1 [N].


Data range: -200000 [N] – 200000 [N] (-20t – 20t)
Binary indication: FFFCF2C0H – 00030D40H

7.6.1 Basic Communication Text


There are two formats of transmission texts used for communicating result data: one with data blocks
and one without. The format with data blocks is used when sending quality data and time series data.
Both formats have a communication byte number (2 bytes) and function code (2 bytes) at the head,
and if required has variable length data following the head.
Enter the total number of send text bytes in “No. of Send Bytes” (including communication byte number
itself). A maximum of 1024 bytes can be sent.
The function code is a code that displays this text function.

Without data

Communication Function code


byte number 2 bytes

No. of send bytes 4

Functions 190 Electro Press JP-S


With data (Quality control data, Time-Series data)
Communication Function code Number of Data Block 1 Block 2 Block N
byte number 2bytes blocks (N/Max 255) (Variable (Variable (Variable
2bytes 2bytes length) length) length)

No. of send bytes


MAX 1024 bytes

Block byte number Block code Block Data


2bytes 2bytes (Variable length)

No. of block bytes


MAX 1018 bytes

If there is a data, no. of data blocks follows the function code.


The block has a “No. of block bytes” and “Block code” at the head, and has variable length block data”
following the head.
The block code displays the contents of the block data.

 Arrangement Method of Multibyte Data (Byte Order)


Data of 2 or more bytes is arranged in order of upper and lower levels (big-endian).]
For example, Acknowledge ACK (function code 0600H) does not have data, and the communication
byte number is 4 bytes. The actual communication text that is transmitted is as shown below.

 Communication text data example: Acknowledge


Communication
Function Code
bytes number
00 04 06 00

Position data and load data in result data are described in two words
Data is transmitted in order of lower and upper levels.
Two-word data is processed in the contrary order to Ethernet IO.

Functions 191 Electro Press JP-S


7.6.2 Result Data Send Procedure
The data send and receive procedures when sending and receiving results data is as shown in the
schematic diagram below.
Only the function codes are written in the transmission data shown in the diagram. For example, the
actual sent text for the acknowledge send data is “00040600H”.
For details on the type of function code and details of the data block, see section 7.6.3 onwards.

Client Press
1. 1. Receive mode start is announced for the
Result Data result data for the press
Acknowledge
Receive Mode Start
0600H
0118H
2. If the program is ended during receive
2. End program
Quality control data mode, the press announces the start of
Send starts
Acknowledge 0110H quality control data send to the client
0600H
Quality control data
3. 0100H
3. The quality control data for that shot is sent
Acknowledge
0600H
4. When all of the quality control data is sent,
send end is announced
4. Quality control
data
Acknowledge Send completed
0600H 0111H 5. Next, sending start of the time-series data
5. Time-series data
Send starts
is announced
Acknowledge 0112H
0600H
6. The time-series data for that shot is sent
Time-series data
0101H
6

7. Time-series data
Acknowledge Send completed 7. When all of the time-series data is sent,
0113H send end is announced
0600H

End program

Quality control data 8. Each time the program ends, the same
Send starts process is performed
Acknowledge
0110H
0600H
8.
Time-series
data Send
completed
Acknowledge 0113H
0600H
9. When the receive mode end is announced
9.
Result Data to the press, even if other programs are
Receive Mode End ended, the result data is no longer
0119H Acknowledge
0600H transmitted.

Functions 192 Electro Press JP-S


7.6.3 Function Code
Function
Name Data Function
Code
Quality control data 0100H Yes Code when quality control data is sent Data has
quality control data
For details on the quality control data refer to
“7.6.4 Quality Control Data.”
Time-Series data 0101H Yes Code when time-series data is sent
Data has time-series data
For details on the time-series data, refer to “7.6.4
Time Series Data.”
Quality control data send 0110H None Quality control data (for 1 shot) send starts
starts
Quality control data send 0111H None Quality control data (for 1 shot) send ends
ends
Time-Series data send 0112H None Time-series data (for 1 shot) send starts
starts
Time-Series data send 0113H None Time-series data (for 1 shot) send ends
ends
Result data receive 0118H None The mode for receiving results data (quality control
mode Start data, time-series data) starts. After receiving this
command, the press sends results data for each
shot. There is quality control data and time-series
data in the results data. Settings for the sent data
are performed in the *“Mode of the saving result
data” parameter.
If the settings are configured in *“Store Quality
Data”, only quality control data is sent.
If “Quality and Time-Series Data” is set,
time-series data is sent after the quality control
data.
If *“Do not store the result data” is set, nothing is
sent.
Result data receive 0119H None Result data receive mode ends.
Mode End
Acknowledge 0600H None Receive text could be processed
Negative acknowledge 1500H None Receive text could not be processed
- Cannot receive the data quantity of the specified
send bytes (timeout)
- Unsupported block codes exist in the data
- Block data that cannot be processed normally is
present (upper/lower limit error in the set data etc)
- Other error

Functions 193 Electro Press JP-S


7.6.4 Quality Control Data
Quality control data is formed with the following tables.

Name Block Code Details


1) Program result block 0000H 1 block
2) Step drive results block 0004H Blocks for the number of stages
3) Step sensor results block 0005H Blocks for the number of judges for each
level

1. Program result block


No. of
N Details
Bytes
1-2 2 No. of Block Bytes (184 = 00B8H)
3-4 2 Block Code (0000H)
5-8 4 Program number
1-3 40 one-byte characters Program name (1st character)
1-3 UTF-8 used Program name (2nd character)
1 character is max. 3 bytes ・・・
9-132 1-3 40*3=120 Program name (40th character)
+ NULL terminate Program name (NULL)
1 =121 (domain is 124)
Unused domain is 0
133-136 4 Execute program Year 0-99
137-140 4 Execute program Month 1-12
141-144 4 Execute program Day 1-31
145-148 4 Execute program Hour 0-23
149-152 4 Execute program Minute 0-59
153-156 4 No. of pressing steps
157-160 4 Work contact position
161-164 4 Touching Load
165-168 4 Program End Position
169-172 4 Program End Load
173-176 4 Judge results OK/NG 0: OK -1: NG
177-180 4 Program drive results 0: Finish -1: Finish in middle
Finish in middle code
0: Normal end
1: Maximum load error
2: Position limit over
3: Maximum drive distance error
181-184 4 4: Maximum drive time error
5: Section judge NG
7: Emergency stop
8: Maximum stroke error
9: Load zone sensor fault
10: Servo error

Functions 194 Electro Press JP-S


2. Step drive result block
No. of
NO Details
Bytes
1-2 2 No. of Block Bytes (32 = 0020H)
3-4 2 Block Code (0004H)
5-8 4 Program number
9-12 4 Step number
Step drive type
1: Constant speed/Stop at the setting position
2: Constant speed/Stop at the setting distance
3: Constant speed/Stop at the setting load
4: Constant speed/Stop at the setting increase load
13-16 4
5: Constant speed/Stop at the setting event
6: Constant load/Stop at the setting time
7: Constant load/Stop at the setting position
8: Constant load/Stop at the setting distance
9: Constant load/Stop at the setting event
17-20 4 Step end position
21-24 4 Step end load
25-28 4 Step sensor number (No. of judge in the step)
29-32 4 Step end judge number

3. Step sensor result block


No. of
NO Details
Bytes
1-2 2 No. of Block Bytes
3-4 2 Block Code (0005H)
5-8 4 Program number
9-12 4 Step number
13-16 4 Judge number of step
17-XX The data below conforms to “Judge type results format” (See section
7.6.5)

Functions 195 Electro Press JP-S


7.6.5 Judge Type Results Format
1. Lode zone judge
NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 1
21-24 4 Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit load value (upper limit load at the timing of judge)
29-32 4 Judge lower limit load value (lower limit load at the timing of judge)
33-36 4 Judge load value
37-40 4 Judge position

2. Load judge/Given position


NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 2
21-24 4 Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit load value (upper limit load at the timing of judge)
29-32 4 Judge lower limit load value (lower limit load at the timing of judge)
33-36 4 Judge load value
37-40 4 Judge position

3. Load judge/Given distance


NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 3
21-24 4 Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit load value (upper limit load at the timing of judge)
29-32 4 Judge lower limit load value (lower limit load at the timing of judge)
33-36 4 Judge load value
37-40 4 Judge position

4. Position judge (Start steps)


NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 4
21-24 4 Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit load value (upper limit load at the timing of judge)
29-32 4 Judge lower limit load value (lower limit load at the timing of judge)
33-36 4 Judge load value
37-40 4 Judge position

5. Distance judge
NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 5
21-24 4 Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit load value (upper limit load at the timing of judge)
29-32 4 Judge lower limit load value (lower limit load at the timing of judge)
33-36 4 Judge load value
37-40 4 Judge position

Functions 196 Electro Press JP-S


6. Peak judge/Given position
NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 6
21-24 4 Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit load value (upper limit load at the timing of judge)
29-32 4 Judge lower limit load value (lower limit load at the timing of judge)
33-36 4 Judge load value
37-40 4 Judge position

7. Peak judge /Given distance


NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 7
21-24 4 Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit load value (upper limit load at the timing of judge)
29-32 4 Judge lower limit load value (lower limit load at the timing of judge)
33-36 4 Judge load value
37-40 4 Judge position

8. Bottom judge /Given position


NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 8
21-24 4 Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit load value (upper limit load at the timing of judge)
29-32 4 Judge lower limit load value (lower limit load at the timing of judge)
33-36 4 Judge load value
37-40 4 Judge position

9. Bottom judge /Given distance


NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 9
21-24 4 Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit load value (upper limit load at the timing of judge)
29-32 4 Judge lower limit load value (lower limit load at the timing of judge)
33-36 4 Judge load value
37-40 4 Judge position

10. Top judge /Given position


NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 10
Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
21-24 4
-4: No judge value NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit load value (upper limit load at the timing of judge)
29-32 4 Judge lower limit load value (lower limit load at the timing of judge)
33-36 4 Judge load value
37-40 4 Judge position

Functions 197 Electro Press JP-S


11. Top judge /Given distance
NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 11
Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
21-24 4
-4: No judge value NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit load value (upper limit load at the timing of judge)
29-32 4 Judge lower limit load value (lower limit load at the timing of judge)
33-36 4 Judge load value
37-40 4 Judge position

12. Valley judge/Given position


NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 12
Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
21-24 4
-4: No judge value NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit load value (upper limit load at the timing of judge)
29-32 4 Judge lower limit load value (lower limit load at the timing of judge)
33-36 4 Judge load value
37-40 4 Judge position

13. Valley judge /Given distance


NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 13
Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
21-24 4
-4: No judge value NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit load value (upper limit load at the timing of judge)
29-32 4 Judge lower limit load value (lower limit load at the timing of judge)
33-36 4 Judge load value
37-40 4 Judge position

14. Peak to peak judge /Given position


NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 14
21-24 4 Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit load value (upper limit load at the timing of judge)
29-32 4 Judge lower limit load value (lower limit load at the timing of judge)
33-36 4 Judge load value
37-40 4 Judge position

15. Peak to peak judge /Given distance


NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code:15
21-24 4 Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit load value (upper limit load at the timing of judge)
29-32 4 Judge lower limit load value (lower limit load at the timing of judge)
33-36 4 Judge load value
37-40 4 Judge position

Functions 198 Electro Press JP-S


16. DIF1 judge /Given position
NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code:16
Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
21-24 4
-4: No judge value NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit DIF1 load value
29-32 4 Judge lower limit DIF1 load value
33-36 4 DIF slant judge value
37-40 4 Judge DIF2 load value
41-44 4 Judge distance
45-48 4 DIF slant value

17. DIF1 judge /Given distance


NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 17
Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
21-24 4
-4: No judge value NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit DIF1 load value
29-32 4 Judge lower limit DIF1 load value
33-36 4 DIF slant judge value
37-40 4 Judge DIF2 load value
41-44 4 Judge distance
45-48 4 DIF slant value

18. DIF2 judge /Given position


NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 18
Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
21-24 4
-4: No judge value NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit DIF2 load value
29-32 4 Judge lower limit DIF2 load value
33-36 4 DIF slant judge value
37-40 4 Judge DIF2 load value
41-44 4 Judge distance
45-48 4 DIF slant value

19. DIF2 judge /Given distance


NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 19
Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
21-24 4
-4: No judge value NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit DIF2 load value
29-32 4 Judge lower limit DIF2 load value
33-36 4 DIF slant judge value
37-40 4 Judge DIF2 load value
41-44 4 Judge distance
45-48 4 DIF slant value

Functions 199 Electro Press JP-S


20. Position judge (Start steps)
NO Byte Details
17-20 4 Judge type code: 23
21-24 4 Judge results 0: OK -1: Upper NG -2: Lower NG -3: Out of judge range NG
25-28 4 Judge upper limit load value (upper limit load at the timing of judge)
29-32 4 Judge lower limit load value (lower limit load at the timing of judge)
33-36 4 Judge position
37-40 4 Judge load value

7.6.6 Time-Series data


Time-series data is created from the time-series data block (multiple blocks depending on data length).

 Time-series data block


N Byte Details
1-2 2 No. of Block Bytes
3-4 2 Block Code (0007H)
5-8 4 Program number
9-12 4 Sampling interval 0: 5msec 1: 10msec 2: 20msec 3: 50msec 4: 100msec
13-16 4 All time-series data quantity
17-20 4 Time-series data starting number for this block
21-24 4 Time-series data number (N) for this block
25-28 4 Data 1 Position
29-32 4 Load
33-36 4 Data 2 Position
37-40 4 Load
・・・
4 Data N Position
4 Load

Functions 200 Electro Press JP-S


7.6.7 Quality Control Data (received example)
The following is a sample received quality control data.
The sample has two-phase drive in program number 1 and a judge (load judge, set position) in the
second line. The sample does not have signal sampling result.
In order to receive quality control data, it is required to set parameter [Mode of the saving result data]
as [Store Quality Data] and transmit the parameter value to the Electro Press. Setting and transmission
performed using computer software (JP-S designer). For details on how to use this software, see the
“PC Operation” operating manual.
Before starting communication, it is required to establish connection of board number 10028.

 Port Number
Port number for receiving result data

Port number Function


10028 Receive results data

Start receiving result data


• Client  Press, Start receiving result data
00040118
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0118 Function Code 0118H

• Press  Client, Acknowledge


00040600
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0600 Function Code 0600H Acknowledge

 Perform one shot


Start receiving result data
• Press  Client, Start sending quality control data
00040110
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0110 Function Code 0110H Start sending quality control data

• Client  Press, Acknowledge


00040600
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0600 Function Code 0600H Acknowledge

Functions 201 Electro Press JP-S


• Press  Client, Program result block
00BE0100000100B80000000000010000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000A0000000A0000001700000012
00000029000000020001185E000001950000C7E700000080000000000000000000000000
N HEX Details
1-2 00BE No. of Communication Bytes 190=00BEH
3-4 0100 Function Code, Quality Control Data 0100H
5-6 0001 No. of Block 1=0001H
7-8 00B8 Block 1, No. of Bytes 84 = 00B8H
9-10 0000 Block 1, Block Code: Program Result Block 0000H
11-14 00000001 Program No 1 – 00000001H
15-138 ・・・・ Program Name (124Bytes)
139-142 0000000A Execute Program Year 0-99 2010 10 = 0000000AH
143-146 0000000A Execute Program Month 1-12 October 10 = 0000000AH
147-150 00000017 Execute Program Day 1-31 23rd 23 = 00000017H
151-154 00000012 Execute Program Hour 0~23 18 18 = 00000012H
155-158 00000029 Execute Program Minute 0-59 41 41 = 00000029H
159-162 00000002 No. of Pressing Steps 2 steps
163-166 0001185E Work contact position 71.774mm 71774 = 0001185EH
167-170 00000195 Touching Load 405N 405 = 00000195H
171-174 0000C7E7 Program End Position 51.175mm 51175 = 0000C7E7H
175-178 00000080 Program End Load 128N 128 = 00000080H
179-182 00000000 Judge Results OK/Fault 0: OK
183-186 00000000 Program Results 0: OK
187-190 00000000 Program process stopped code 0: Program ended nomal

• Press  Client, Acknowledge


00040600
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0600 Function Code 0600H Acknowledge

• Press  Client, Step 1 Result Block


002601000001002000040000000100000001000000010001387F000005C70000000000000000
N HEX Details
1-2 0026 No. of Communication Bytes 38 = 0026H
3-4 0100 Function Code, Quality Control Data 0100H
5-6 0001 No. of Block 1 = 0001H
7-8 0020 Block 1, No. of Bytes 32 = 0020H
9-10 0004 Block 1, Block Code: Step Drive Result Block 0004H
11-14 00000001 Program No. 1 = 00000001H
15-18 00000001 Step No. 1 = 00000001H
19-22 00000001 Step Drive Mode Constant Speed/Position Stop 11
23-26 0001387F Step End Position 79.999mm 79999 = 0001387FH
27-30 000005C7 Step End Load 1479N 1479 = 0000057CH
31-34 00000000 No. of Step sensor 0
35-38 00000000 No. Step End Judge 0

Functions 202 Electro Press JP-S


• Client  Press, Acknowledge
00040600
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0600 Function Code 0600H Acknowledge

• Press  Client, Step 2 Result Block, Step 2 Judge Block


004E010000020020000400000001000000020000000100015F8E00000AB10000000100000000
002800050000000100000002000000010000000200000000000009CB000007DE000009400001
5421
N HEX Details
1-2 004E No. of Communication Bytes 78 = 004EH
3-4 0100 Function Code, Quality Control Data 0100H
5-6 0002 No. of Block 2 = 0002H
7-8 0020 Block 1, No. of Bytes 32 = 0020H
9-10 0004 Block 1, Block Code: Step Drive Result Block 0004H
11-14 00000001 Program No. 1 = 00000001H
15-18 00000002 Step No. 2 = 00000002H
19-22 00000001 Step Drive Mode Constant Speed/Position Stop 1
23-26 00015F8E Step End Position 89.998mm 89998 = 00015F8EH
27-30 00000AB1 Step End Load 2737N 2737 = 00000AB1H
31-34 00000001 No. of Step sensor 1
35-38 00000000 No. Step End Judge 0
39-40 0028 Block 2, No. of Bytes 40 = 0028H
41-42 0005 Block 2, Block Code: Step Drive Result Block 0005H
43-46 00000001 Program No. 1 = 00000001H
47-50 00000002 Step No. 2 = 00000002H
51-54 00000001 Step sensor First 1 =0 0000001H
55-58 00000002 Judge Type Load Judge/Given Distance 2
59-62 00000000 Judge Result OK:0
63-66 000009CB Judge Upper Limit Load 2507N 2507 = 000009CBH
67-70 000007DE Judge Lower Limit Load 2014N 2014 = 000007DEH
71-74 00000940 Judge Load 2368N 2368 = 00000940H
75-78 00015421 Judge Position 87.073mm 87073 = 00015421H

• Client  Press, Acknowledge


00040600
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0600 Function Code 0600H Acknowledge

• Press  Client, Finish transmitting quality control data (1 shot)


00040111
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0111 Function Code 0111H Finish transmitting quality control data (1shot)

Functions 203 Electro Press JP-S


• Client  Press, Acknowledge
00040600
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0600 Function Code 0600H Acknowledge

7.6.8 Time-Series Data (Example of receiving data)


The following is a sample of receiving time-series data.
Electro Press is actually set for “Quality Control Data + Time-Series Data); when 1 shot is performed
quality control data is sent (refer to the previous section).

After having received “Finish Transmitting Quality Control Data (000140111), Acknowledge
(00040600) is returned. Then sending “Start Transmitting Time-Series Data”.

• Press  Client, Start transmitting time-series data (1 shot)


00040112
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0112 Function Code 0112H Start Transmitting Time-Series data (1 shot)

• Client  Press, Acknowledge


00040600
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0600 Function Code 0600H Acknowledge

• Press  Client, Time-Series Data 1

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Functions 204 Electro Press JP-S

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0
00113EA0000011A000113FE0000010B0001141A0000010B0001142E0000010B0001144F00000
112000114620000011A0001147E000001220001149200000129000114B200000129000114C200
000129000114E200000129000114F5000001290001150A00000131
N HEX Details
1-2 03EE No. of Communication Bytes 1006=03EEH
3-4 0101 Function Code, Time-Series Data 0101H
5-6 0001 No of Block 1=0001H
7-8 03E8 Block 1, No. of Bytes 1000 = 03E8H
9-10 0007 Block 1, Block Code: Time-Series Data 0007H
11-14 00000001 Program No. 1 = 00000001H
15-18 00000000 Sampling interval 0:5 msec 0 = 00000000H
19-22 00000182 No. of All Time-Series Data 386 386 = 00000182H
23-26 00000000 First Time-Series Data No. of Step 0 as first
27-30 0000007A No. of Time-Series Data of Block 122 = 0000007AH
31-34 0000C35D Position 50.0m 50013 = 0000C35DH
35-38 00000062 Load 1 98N 98 = 00000062H
39-42 0000C376 Position 2 50.038mm 50038 = 0000C376H
43-46 00000071 Load 2 113N 113 = 00000071H
・・・ ・・・ ・・・・・・・・・
991-994 000114F5 Position 121 70.901mm 70901 = 000114F5H
995-998 00000129 Load 121 297N 297 = 00000129H
999-1002 0001150A Position 122 70.922mm 70922 = 0001150AH
1003-1006 00000131 Load 122 305N 305 =0 0000131H

• Client  Press, Acknowledge


00040600
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0600 Function Code 0600H Acknowledge

Functions 205 Electro Press JP-S


• Press  Client, Time-Series Data 2
03EE0101000103E800070000000100000000000001820000007A0000007A0001152600000139
000115.................60000060400013BFC0000061B00013CA80000063200013D3F00000632
N HEX Details
1-2 03EE No. of Communication Bytes 1006=03EEH
3-4 0101 Function Code, Time-Series Data 0101H
5-6 0001 No of Block 1=0001H
7-8 03E8 Block 1, No. of Bytes 1000 = 03E8H
9-10 0007 Block 1, Block Code: Time-Series Data 0007H
11-14 00000001 Program No. 1 = 00000001H
15-18 00000000 Sampling interval 0:5 msec 0 = 00000000H
19-22 00000182 No. of All Time-Series Data 386 386 = 00000182H
23-26 0000007A First Time-Series Data No. of Step 122 = 0000007AH
27-30 0000007A No. of Time-Series Data of Block 122=0000007AH
31-34 00011526 Position 123 70.950mm 70950 = 00011526H
35-38 00000139 Load 123 313N 313 = 00000139H
・・・ ・・・ ・・・・・・・・・
999-1002 00013D3F Position 244 81.215mm 81215 = 00013D3FH
1003-1006 00000632 Load 1586N 1586 = 00000632H

• Client  Press, Acknowledge


00040600
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0600 Function Code 0600H Acknowledge

• Press  Client, Time-Series Data 3


03EE0101000103E80007000000010000000000000182000000F40000007A00013DF300000651
00013E760000066100013F2F00000668....
067B0000008000010180000000690000FE6300000071
N HEX Details
1-2 03EE No. of Communication Bytes 1006=03EEH
3-4 0101 Function Code, Time-Series Data 0101H
5-6 0001 No of Block 1=0001H
7-8 03E8 Block 1, No. of Bytes 1000 = 03E8H
9-10 0007 Block 1, Block Code: Time-Series Data 0007H
11-14 00000001 Program No. 1 = 00000001H
15-18 00000000 Sampling interval 0:5 msec 0 = 00000000H
19-22 00000182 No. of All Time-Series Data 386 386 = 00000182H
23-26 000000F4 First Time-Series Data No. of Step 244=000000F4H
27-30 0000007A No. of Time-Series Data of Block 122=0000007AH
31-34 00013DF3 Position 245 81.395mm 81395 = 00013DF3H
35-38 00000651 Load 245 1617N 1617 = 00000651H

Functions 206 Electro Press JP-S


N HEX Details
・・・ ・・・ ・・・・・・・・・
999-1002 0000FE62 Position 366 65.123mm 65123 = 0000FE62H
1003-1006 00000071 Load 366 113N 113 = 00000071H

• Client  Press, Acknowledge


00040600
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0600 Function Code 0600H Acknowledge

• Press  Client, Time-Series Data 4


03EE0101000103E800070000000100000000000001820000016E000000140000FA0700000069
0000F6EB000000620000F200000000710000EEFF000000710000EAEA000000880000E819000
000710000E3C7000000710000E132000000620000DDC1000000710000DB6C000000690000D7
EB000000710000D5DF000000880000D334000000690000D16F000000620000CED8000000690
000CD64000000780000CB8D000000800000CA61000000780000C8C2000000800000C7E7000
00080000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000

Functions 207 Electro Press JP-S


N HEX Details
1-2 03EE No. of Communication Bytes 1006=03EEH
3-4 0101 Function Code, Time-Series Data 0101H
5-6 0001 No of Block 1=0001H
7-8 03E8 Block 1, No. of Bytes 1000 = 03E8H
9-10 0007 Block 1, Block Code: Time-Series Data 0007H
11-14 00000001 Program No. 1 = 00000001H
15-18 00000000 Sampling interval 0:5 msec 0 = 00000000H
19-22 00000182 No. of All Time-Series Data 386 386 = 00000182H
23-26 0000016E First Time-Series Data No. of Step 366=0000016EH
27-30 00000014 No. of Time-Series Data of Block 20 = 00000014H
31-34 0000FA07 Position 367 64.007mm 64007 = 0000FA07H
35-38 00000069 Load 367 105N 105 = 00000069H
・・・ ・・・ ・・・・・・・・・
183-186 0000C7E7 Position 386 51.175mm 51175 = 0000C7E7H
187-190 00000080 Load 386 128N 128 = 00000080H
・・・ 00000000 ・・・・・・・・・ 0 to be repeated up to end of block
999-1002 00000000
1003-1006 00000000

• Client  Press, Acknowledge


00040600
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0600 Function Code 0600H Acknowledge

• Press  Client, Finish transmitting time-series data (1 shot)


0040113
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0113 Function Code 0113H Finish Transmitting Time-Series data (1 shot)

• Client  Press, Acknowledge


00040600
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0600 Function Code 0600H Acknowledge

Functions 208 Electro Press JP-S


8. RS-232C

8.1 RS-232C Overview


The controller is equipped with RS-232C as standard.
RS-232C connector is located on the front side of the controller.
The following functions are available by sending/receiving data
to/from PC or external device via RS-232C.

1. Access to relay/register
2. Setting Ethernet IP address RS-232C
connector

Function 1 is to control the Electro Press by accessing relay/register, as done with Digital Input/Output
(DIO) or Fieldbus.

Function 2 is to set Ethernet IP address of the controller, using the PC software (JP-S Designer).
For details of setting, refer to the Operation Manual (PC Operation) “5.9.5 IP Address Setting Press”.

8.2 RS232C Connector


RS232C Connector
Press Host (PC)
PIN No. Terminal Function PIN No. Terminal Function
3 RxD Receive data 3 TxD Send data
2 TxD Send data 2 RxD Receive data
8 RTS Send request 8 CTS Send OK
7 CTS Send OK 7 RTS Send request
5 GND Ground 5 GND Ground
Connector: D-SUB 9Pin Connector: D-SUB 9Pin

1 5

6 9

Functions 209 Electro Press JP-S


8.3 RS232C Communication Setting (Baud Rate Setting)
Baud rate and parity can be set for communication of RS232C.

• Baud rate
9600bps/19200bps/38400bps/57600bps

• Parity
None / Even number / Odd number

Set as parameter using the PC software (JP-S Designer) and select “Press”  “Send Data” to send to
the Electro Press.

Note that data width (8 bit) and stop bit width (1 bit) are fixed and they cannot be changed.

8.4 RS232C Communication Format


Communication format is show below, with top character ($) and terminator (CR) at each end, and
check SUM. All the values including check SUM are converted into hexadecimal numbers and they will
be sent using ASCII characters ('0’~'9’, 'A’~'F’). Therefore, data size of the value is as twice as big as
the original data size (byte number)

Total

$ CR

SUM
[SUM] Range

Port LEN FUNC DATA

[LEN] Range

Item Details Byte


$ Top character 1
Port Data identification port number 4
LEN Data width 4
FUNC Function code 4
Data body (depends on port number/function
DATA 1...
code)
SUM Check SUM value 2
CR Terminator (carriage return) 1

Functions 210 Electro Press JP-S


 Check SUM calculation
Check SUM value (SUM): Last 2 digits of the sum of the range in 8-bit indigent unit without sign.
The top character (S) is not included in the range.

Example

$ 2 4 2 9 0 0 0 F 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 C 2 C
R
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 0
4 2 4 2 9 0 0 0 6 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 2 d

LEN (Data width) SUM (check SUM)


32H+34H+・・・+30H+31H
15bytes  000FH
= 50+52+・・・+48+49
= 962 = 3C2H
Last 2 digits: C2

8.5 Control by Access to Relay/Register via RS232C


The Electro Press can be controlled by access to relay/register (IO memory)
The port number for controlling by access to relay/register is 10029=272DH.

• Port number
RS232C IO: For controlling by access to relay/register

Port number Function


10029=272DH Control by access to relay/register

8.5.1 Data Send Procedure


 Relay/Register Read
Client Press Client sends “IO Relay Read” command to the press.
IO Relay
Normal
Press receives the command, and sends a signal
Read
0100H response that has the IO relay data as a block.
0100H

IO Relay
Read Normal
0101H response If the same client sends an “IO Data Read”
0101H
command to the press, the press receives the
command and sends the IO register data as data
that has a block.

Functions 211 Electro Press JP-S


 Relay/Register Write
Client Press
IO Relay Client sends the “IO Relay Write” command (with
Normal
Read
response the details to be written to the data block) to the
0102H
0102H
press. The press writes the received IO relay data,
and returns a normal response.
IO Data
Write Normal
0103H response The client sends the “IO Relay Write” command
0103H (with the details to be written to the data block) to
the press. The press writes the received IO relay
data, and returns a normal response.

8.5.2 Function Code


Function
Function Name Function
Code
IO relay read 0100H Reads the IO relay state (ON/OFF) (Maximum 128
point continuous)
IO data read 0101H IO data value read (Maximum 64 points continuous)
IO Relay write 0102H Value (ON/OFF) is written to IO relay (Maximum 128
point continuous)
IO data write 0103H Value is written to IO data (Maximum 64 point
continuous)
IO relay read abnormal 8100H Process was not performed correctly for the IO relay
response read command
IO data read abnormal 8101H Process was not performed correctly for the IO data
response read command
O relay write abnormal 8102H Process was not performed correctly for the IO relay
response write command
IO data write abnormal 8103H Process was not performed correctly for the IO data
response write command

8.5.3 IO Relay Read


 Client  Press
IO relay data as many as the “Read point” from the top IO relay number is output.

N Byte Details
1 4 Port Number (10029=272DH)
5 4 No. of Communication Bytes(4+4+4+4=16=0010H)
9 4 Function Code (0100H)
13 4 Top IO Register Number: 3000H-3FFFH
17 4 Read point: 1-128 (m)

Functions 212 Electro Press JP-S


No. of
Port No. Communication Function Code Data
Bytes
Top IO Relay No. Read register
272DH 0010H 0100H 3000H-3FFFH number
0001H-0080H

Example: Top IO Relay Number= 3810H, Read register number=128=80H


$272D0010010038100080F5(CR)

 Press  Client
IO register data as many as “Read register number” from the top IO register number is output.

N No. of Bytes Details


1 4 Port Number (10029=272DH)
5 4 No. of Communication Bytes (4+4+4+4*n)
9 4 Function Code (0100H)
13 4 Top IO Relay Number: 3000H~3FFFH
17 4 IO Relay Data 1 B0-B16 (IO Relay data: Refer order of the bit store)
21 4 IO Relay Data 2 B0-B16 (IO Relay data: Refer order of the bit store)
・・・・
4 IO Relay Data n B0-B16 (IO Relay data: Refer order of the bit store)

• Normal Response
Port No. Bytes No. Function Code Data
Top IO Register No IO Relay Data 1
272DH 0010H-010CH 0100H 3000H-3FFFH

Data

IO Relay Data 2 IO Relay Data 3 - IO Relay Data n

• Abnormal Response(Function Code Error)


Port No. Bytes No. Function Code Data

272DH 000CH 8100H 0001H

• Abnormal Response (Data Error)


Port No. Bytes No. Function Code Data

272DH 000CH 8100H 0002H

Functions 213 Electro Press JP-S


 IO Relay Data Bit device storage sequence
The read IO relay status is stored in the sequence of lower level  upper level. Also, if the number of
read points is not a multiple of 16, the left over bits are 0.
Top IO relay number
0:OFF
1:ON

B1 B1 B13 B12 B1 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0


Data 1



・ B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B B B1 B0
Data n

Read Points: m, number of data: n


n = m/16 (roundup)

8.5.4 IO Register Read (Read Numerical Type Data)


 Client  Press
IO register data as many as “Read register number” from the top IO register number is requested.

N Byte Details
1 4 Port Number (10029=272DH)
5 4 No. of Communication Bytes (4+4+4+4=16=0010H)
9 4 Function Code (0101H)
13 4 Top IO Register Number: 300H-3FFH
17 4 Read register number: 1-64 (n)

Port No. Byte Function Code Data


TopIORelay No. Read register No.
272DH 0010H 0101H 300H - 3FFH 0001H-0040H

Example: Top IO Relay No. = 0374H, Read register No. 48 words=0030H


$272D0010010103740030F3(CR)

Functions 214 Electro Press JP-S


 Press  Client
IO register data as many as “Read register number” from the top IO register number is output.

N Byte Details
1 4 Port Number (10029=272DH)
5 4 Bytes (4+4+4+4*n)
9 4 Function Code (0100H)
13 4 Top IO Register Number: 300H~3FFH
17 4 Register data 1
21 4 Register data 2
・・・
4 Register data n

• Normal Response
Port No. Byte Function Code Data
Top IO Register No
272DH 0010H-010CH 0101H 300H-3FFH
Register Data 1

Data

Register Data 2 Register Data 3 - Register Data n

For Register Data 1-Register Data n, 16bit is 1Data (Register). Read register data as many as required
will be consecutively output.

• Abnormal Response (Function Code Error)


Port No. Byte Function Code Data

272DH 000CH 8101H 0001H

• Abnormal Response (Data Error)


Port No. Byte Function Code Data

272DH 000CH 8101H 0002H

Functions 215 Electro Press JP-S


8.5.5 IO Relay Write
 Client  Press
IO relay data write as many as the “Read point” from the top IO relay number is requested.

N Byte Details
1 4 Port Number (10029=272DH)
5 4 Bytes(4+4+4+4+4*n)
9 4 Function Code (0102H)
13 4 Top IO Register Number: 300H-3FFH
17 4 Write point: 1-128
21 4 IO Relay Data 1 B0-B16(See below)
25 4 IO Relay Data 1 B0-B16(See below)
・・・・
4 IO Relay Data 1 B0-B16(See below)

Port Number Bytes Function Code Data


Top IO RelayNo. Write point
272DH 0010H-010CH 0102H 3000H-37FFH 0001H-0080H

Data

IO Relay data 1 IO Relay data 2 IO Relay data n


-

 IO Relay Data Bit device storage sequence


The read IO relay status is stored in the sequence of lower level-> upper level. Also, if the number of
write points is not a multiple of 16, the left over bits are 0. Top IO relay number
0:OFF
1:ON

B1 B1 B13 B1 B1 B1 B B B B B B B B B B
Data 1




B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B B B B B B B B B B
Data n

NOTE
• Always ensure that the specified write points match the data n number.
Write Points: m, number of data: n
n = m/16 (roundup)
For example, if there are 16 write points, set the data n number as 1 (word).

Functions 216 Electro Press JP-S


Example: Top IO relay number-3000H, Write point m=16=0010H, n=1
$272D00140102300000103C3CD7(CR)

 Press  Client
If write was performed according to the client request, the top IO relay number and write points are
output.

• Normal Response
N Byte Details
1 4 Port Number (10029=272DH)
5 4 Byte(s) (4+4+4+4=16=10H)
9 4 Function Code (0102)
13 4 Top IO Relay Number: 3000H – 3FFFH
17 4 Write point: 1 – 128

Port Number Bytes Function Code Data


Top IO Relay No. Write points
272DH 0010H 0102H (Request value) (Request value)

• Abnormal Response (Abnormal function code)


Port Number Bytes Function Code Data

272DH 000CH 8102H 0001H

• Abnormal Response (Abnormal data)


Port Number Bytes Function Code Data

272DH 000CH 8102H 0002H

8.5.6 Register Write (Writing Numeric Data)


 Client  Press
IO register data as many as the “Write register number” from the top IO register number is requested.
N Byte Details
1 4 Port Number (10029=272DH)
5 4 Bytes (4+4+4+4+4*n)
9 4 Function Code (0103H)
13 4 Top IO Register Number: 300H-3FFH
17 4 Write register No.: 1-64 (n)
21 4 Register data 1
25 4 Register data 2
・・・・
4 Register data n

Functions 217 Electro Press JP-S


Port Number Bytes Function Code Data
Top IO Relay No Write points
0010H ... 0103H
272DH 300H-37FH 0001H-0040H

Data

Register Data 1 Register Data 2 - Register Data n

Example: Top I/O RegisterNO.=0300H, Write RegisterNo.=0002H(2)


$272D00180103030000023C3C5A5AC9(CR)

 Press  Client
If write was performed according to the client request, the top IO register number and write register no
are output (echo back).

• Normal Response
N Byte Details
1 4 Port Number (10029=272DH)
5 4 Bytes(4+4+4+4=16=10H)
9 4 Function Code (0103H)
13 4 Top IO Register Number:300H-3FFH
17 4 Write register No.: 1-64 (n)

Port Number Bytes Function Code Data


Top IO Register Write Register
272DH 0010H 0103H (Request Value) (Request Value)

• Abnormal Response (Abnormal function code)


Port Number Bytes Function Code Data

272DH 000CH 8103H 0001H

• Abnormal Response (Abnormal Data)


Port Number Bytes Function Code Data

272DH 000CH 8103H 0002H

Functions 218 Electro Press JP-S


9. SPECIFICATIONS

 JP-S 0501
Specifications JP-S0501
Maximum pressing capacity 5kN (510kgf)
Load detection denomination*1 2N
Stroke 100mm/150mm/250mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01 – 216mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01 – 35mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±50N for 0.5kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 5kg
Compatible controller JP-SC0501
Three-Phase or Single-Phase, AC180 – 250V
Motor power supply
1.4 – 2.0A 50/60Hz (200W)
Dimensions and Press unit (Stroke 100) 65W x 155D x 455H (mm), 12kg
weight (excluding Press unit (Stroke 150) 65W x 155D x 505H (mm), 13kg
cables/protruding Press unit (Stroke 250) 65W x 155D x 655H (mm), 16kg
parts) Controller 79W x 163D x 287H (mm), 3.1kg
Noise 70dB or less

*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.

*2 With the JP-S0501, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately
1.5kN. Holding times are very short if the maximum load (5kn) is applied. (Depending on conditions,
such as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the
affordable holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the
maximum affordable holding time is shortened. Please make sure to set pressing conditions with
enough allowance for possible errors.

*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity.
The load accuracy value represents when pressing with the unit and environment at a constant
temperature.
This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection, and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.

NOTE
• Please understand that the specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to
improve quality.

Functions 219 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S 0501-01
Specifications JP-S0501-01
Maximum pressing capacity 5kN (510kgf)
Load detection denomination*1 2N
Stroke 100mm/150mm/250mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01 – 216mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01 – 35mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±50N for 0.5kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 5kg
Compatible controller JP-SC0501
Three-Phase or Single-Phase, AC180 – 250V
Motor power supply
1.8 – 4.0A 50/60Hz (400W)
Dimensions and Press unit (Stroke 100) 65W x 155D x 455H (mm), 12kg
weight (excluding Press unit (Stroke 150) 65W x 155D x 505H (mm), 13kg
cables/protruding Press unit (Stroke 250) 65W x 155D x 655H (mm), 16kg
parts) Controller 79W x 163D x 287H (mm), 3.1kg
Noise 70dB or less

*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.

*2 With the JP-S0501-01, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately
3kN. Holding times are very short if the maximum load (5kn) is applied. (Depending on conditions,
such as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the
affordable holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the
maximum affordable holding time is shortened. Please make sure to set pressing conditions with
enough allowance for possible errors.

*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity.
The load accuracy value represents when pressing with the unit and environment at a constant
temperature.
This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection, and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.

NOTE
• Please understand that the specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to
improve quality.

Functions 220 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S 1001
Specifications JP-S1001
Maximum pressing capacity 10kN (1020kgf)
Load detection denomination*1 4N
Stroke 100mm/250mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01-216mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01-35mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±100N for 1kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 10kg
Compatible controller JP-SC1001
Three-Phase or Single-Phase, AC180-250V
Motor power supply
1.8-4.0A 50/60Hz (400W)
Dimensions and Press unit (Stroke 100) 65W x 155D x 455H (mm), 12kg
weight (excluding Press unit (Stroke 150) 65W x 155D x 505H (mm), 13kg
cables/protruding Press unit (Stroke 250) 65W x 155D x 655H (mm), 16kg
parts) Controller 79W x 163D x 287H (mm), 3.1kg
Noise 70dB or less

*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.

*2 With the JP-S1001, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately 3kN.
Holding times are very short if the maximum load (10kn) is applied. (Depending on conditions, such
as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the affordable
holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the maximum
affordable holding time is shortened. Please make sure to set pressing conditions with enough
allowance for possible errors.

*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity.
The load accuracy value represents when pressing with the unit and environment at a constant
temperature.
This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection, and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.

NOTE
• Please understand that the specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to
improve quality.

Functions 221 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S 1001-01
Specifications JP-S1001-01
Maximum pressing capacity 10kN (1020kgf)
Load detection denomination*1 4N
Stroke 100mm/250mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01-208mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01-35mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±100N for 1kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 10kg
Compatible controller JP-SC1001-01
Three-Phase or Single-Phase, AC180-250V
Motor power supply
5.3-7.5A 50/60Hz (750W)
Dimensions and Press unit (Stroke 100) 80W x 200D x 455H (mm), 14kg
weight (excluding Press unit (Stroke 250) 80W x 200D x 655H (mm), 18kg
cables/protruding
Controller 79W x 163D x 287H (mm), 3.1kg
parts)
Noise 70dB or less

*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.

*2 With the JP-S1001, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately 6kN.
Holding times are very short if the maximum load (10kn) is applied. (Depending on conditions, such
as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the affordable
holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the maximum
affordable holding time is shortened. Please make sure to set pressing conditions with enough
allowance for possible errors.

*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity.
The load accuracy value represents when pressing with the unit and environment at a constant
temperature.
This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection, and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.

NOTE
• Please understand that the specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to
improve quality.

Functions 222 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S 1001-20
Specifications JP-S1001-20
Maximum pressing capacity 10kN (1020kgf)
Load detection denomination*1 4N
Stroke 100mm/250mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01-216mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01-35mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±100N for 1kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 10kg
Clean class (under the outlet flow condition
Class 1000 (0.30μm)
below)
Outlet flows (Discharge rate) 60NL/min
Exhaust outlet diameter Inner diameter φ19 mm
Compatible controller JP-SC1001-20
Three-Phase or Single-Phase, AC180-250V
Motor power supply
1.8-4.0A 50/60Hz (400W)
Dimensions and Press unit (Stroke 100) 98W x 178D x475H (mm), 13 kg
weight Press unit (Stroke 250) 98W x 178D x 695H (mm), 17 kg
(excluding
cables/protruding Controller 79W x 163D x 287H (mm), 3.1 kg
parts)
Noise 70dB or less

*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.

*2 With the JP-S1001-20, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately
3kN. Holding times are very short if the maximum load (10kn) is applied. (Depending on conditions,
such as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the
affordable holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the
maximum affordable holding time is shortened. Please make sure to set pressing conditions with
enough allowance for possible errors.

*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity.
The load accuracy value represents when pressing with the unit and environment at a constant
temperature.
This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection, and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.

NOTE
• Please understand that the specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to
improve quality.
• Clean room standards: Federal Standard 209D(FED-STD209D)

Functions 223 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S 1501
Specifications JP-S1501
Specifications 15kN (1530kgf)
Load detection denomination*1 8N
Stroke 100mm/200mm/350mm/400mm/450mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01 – 200mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01-35mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±200N for 1.5kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 15kg
Compatible controller JP-SC1501
Three-Phase or Single-Phase, AC180-250V
Motor power supply
5.3-7.5A 50/60Hz (750W)
Press unit (Stroke 100) 80W x 196D x 505H (mm), 20kg
Dimensions and Press unit (Stroke 200) 80W x 196D x 645H (mm), 25kg
weight (excluding Press unit (Stroke 350) 80W x 196D x 845H (mm), 30kg
cables/protruding Press unit (Stroke 400) 80W x 196D x 925H (mm), 33kg
parts) Press unit (Stroke 450) 80W x 196D x 995H (mm), 35kg
Controller 79W x 163D x 287H (mm), 3.1kg
Noise 70dB or less

*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.

*2 With the JP-S1501, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately 6kN.
Holding times are very short if the maximum load (15kn) is applied. (Depending on conditions, such
as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the affordable
holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the maximum
affordable holding time is shortened. Please make sure to set pressing conditions with enough
allowance for possible errors.

*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1.3% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity.
The load accuracy value represents when pressing with the unit and environment at a constant
temperature.
This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection, and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.

NOTE
• Please understand that the specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to
improve quality.

Functions 224 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S 1501-20
Specifications JP-S1501-20
Specifications 15kN (1530kgf)
Load detection denomination*1 8N
Stroke 100mm/200mm/350mm/400mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01-200mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01-35mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±200N for 1.5kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 15kg
Clean class (under the outlet flow condition
Class 1000 (0.3μm)
below)
Outlet flows (Discharge rate) 60NL/min
Exhaust outlet diameter Inner diameter φ19 mm
Compatible controller JP-SC1501-20
Three-Phase or Single-Phase, AC180-250V
Motor power supply
5.3-7.5A 50/60Hz (750W)
Press unit (Stroke 100) 80W x 210D x 530H (mm), 21kg
Dimensions and
Press unit (Stroke 200) 80W x 210D x 680H (mm), 26kg
weight (excluding
Press unit (Stroke 350) 80W x 210D x 895H (mm), 31kg
cables/protruding
Press unit (Stroke 400) 80W x 210D x 980H (mm), 34kg
parts)
Controller 79W x 163D x 287H (mm), 3.1kg
Noise 70dB or less

*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.

*2 With the JP-S1501-20, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately
6kN. Holding times are very short if the maximum load (15kn) is applied. (Depending on conditions,
such as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the
affordable holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the
maximum affordable holding time is shortened. Please make sure to set pressing conditions with
enough allowance for possible errors.

*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1.3% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity.
The load accuracy value represents when pressing with the unit and environment at a constant
temperature.
This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection, and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.

NOTE
• Please understand that the specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to
improve quality.
• Clean room standards: Federal Standard 209D(FED-STD209D)

Functions 225 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S 2001
Specifications JP-S2001
Maximum pressing capacity 20kN (2040kgf)
Load detection denomination *1 8N
Stroke 100mm/200mm/350mm/400mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01-200mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01-35mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±200N for 2kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 20kg
Compatible controller JP-SC2001
Three-Phase or Single-Phase, AC180-250V
Motor power supply
5.3-7.5A 50/60Hz (750W)
Press unit (Stroke 100) 80W x 196D x 505H (mm), 20kg
Dimensions and
Press unit (Stroke 200) 80W x 196D x 645H (mm), 25kg
weight (excluding
Press unit (Stroke 350) 80W x 196D x 845H (mm), 30kg
cables/protruding
Press unit (Stroke 400) 80W x 196D x 925H (mm), 33kg
parts)
Controller 79W x 163D x 287H (mm), 3.1kg
Noise 70dB or less

*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.

*2 With the JP-S2001, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately 6kN.
Holding times are very short if the maximum load (20kn) is applied. (Depending on conditions, such
as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the affordable
holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the maximum
affordable holding time is shortened. Please make sure to set pressing conditions with enough
allowance for possible errors.

*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity.
The load accuracy value represents when pressing with the unit and environment at a constant
temperature.
This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection, and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.

NOTE
• Please understand that the specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to
improve quality.

Functions 226 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S 2001-01
Specifications JP-S2001-01
Maximum pressing capacity 20kN (2040kgf)
Load detection denomination*1 8N
Stroke 100mm/200mm/350mm/400mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01 – 160mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01-35mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±200N for 2kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 20kg
Compatible controller JP-SC2001-01
Three-Phase, AC180-250V
Motor power supply
9.1-12.6A 50/60Hz (2kW)
Press unit (Stroke 100) 80W x 241D x 517H (mm), 24kg
Dimensions and
Press unit (Stroke 200) 80W x 241D x 657H (mm), 28kg
weight (excluding
Press unit (Stroke 350) 80W x 241D x 857H (mm), 35kg
cables/protruding
Press unit (Stroke 400) 80W x 241D x 937H (mm), 37kg
parts)
Controller 104W x 188D x 328H (mm), 4.9kg
Noise 70dB or less

*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.

*2 With the JP-S2001, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately 10kN.
Holding times are very short if the maximum load (20kn) is applied. (Depending on conditions, such
as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the affordable
holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the maximum
affordable holding time is shortened. Please make sure to set pressing conditions with enough
allowance for possible errors.

*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity.
The load accuracy value represents when pressing with the unit and environment at a constant
temperature.
This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection, and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.

NOTE
• Please understand that the specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to
improve quality.

Functions 227 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S 2001-20 / JP-S 2001-30
Specifications JP-S2001-20 / JP-S2001-30
Maximum pressing capacity 20kN (2040kgf)
Load detection denomination*1 8N
Stroke 100mm/200mm/350mm/400mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01-200mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01-35mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±200N for 2kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 20kg
Clean class (under the outlet flow condition
Class 1000 (0.3μm)
below)
Outlet flows (Discharge rate) 60NL/min
Exhaust outlet diameter Inner diameter φ19 mm
Compatible controller JP-SC2001-20 / JP-SC2001-30
Three-Phase or Single-Phase, AC180-250V
Motor power supply
5.3-7.5A 50/60Hz (750W)
Press unit (Stroke 100) 80W x 210D x 530H (mm), 21kg
Dimensions and
Press unit (Stroke 200) 80W x 210D x 680H (mm), 26kg
weight (excluding
Press unit (Stroke 350) 80W x 210D x 895H (mm), 31kg
cables/protruding
Press unit (Stroke 400) 80W x 210D x 980H (mm), 34kg
parts)
Controller 79W x 163D x 287H (mm), 3.1kg
Noise 70dB or less

*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.

*2 With the JP-S2001-20 and the JP-S2001-30, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more
than approximately 6kN. Holding times are very short if the maximum load (20kn) is applied.
(Depending on conditions, such as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible).
If you exceed the affordable holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature
rises, the maximum affordable holding time is shortened. Please make sure to set pressing
conditions with enough allowance for possible errors.

*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity.
The load accuracy value represents when pressing with the unit and environment at a constant
temperature.
This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection, and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.

NOTE
• Please understand that the specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to
improve quality.
• Clean room standards: Federal Standard 209D(FED-STD209D)

Functions 228 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S 3001
Specifications JP-S3001
Maximum pressing capacity 30kN (3060kgf)
Load detection denomination*1 12N
Stroke 100mm/200mm/300mm/350mm/400mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01-210mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01-35mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±300N for 3kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 30kg
Compatible controller JP-SC3001
Three-Phase, AC180-250V
Motor power supply
9.1-12.6A 50/60Hz (2kW)
Press unit (Stroke 100) 100W x 259D x 570H (mm), 35kg
Dimensions and Press unit (Stroke 200) 100W x 259D x 690H (mm), 42kg
weight (excluding Press unit (Stroke 300) 100W x 259D x 810H (mm), 48kg
cables/protruding Press unit (Stroke 350) 100W x 259D x 870H (mm), 52kg
parts) Press unit (Stroke 400) 100W x 259D x 930H (mm), 55kg
Controller 104W x 188D x 328H (mm), 4.9kg
Noise Max 78.1dB *4

*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.

*2 With the JP-S3001, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately 10kN.
Holding times are very short if the maximum load (30kn) is applied. (Depending on conditions, such
as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the affordable
holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the maximum
affordable holding time is shortened. Please make sure to set pressing conditions with enough
allowance for possible errors.

*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity.
The load accuracy value represents when pressing with the unit and environment at a constant
temperature.
This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection, and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.

*4 Sound level measured at a distance of 1 m.

NOTE
• Please understand that the specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to
improve quality.

Functions 229 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S 3001-11
Specifications JP-S3001-11
Maximum pressing capacity 30kN (3060kgf)
Load detection denomination*1 12N
Stroke 100mm/200mm/300mm/350mm/400mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01-210mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01-35mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±300N for 3kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 30kg
Compatible controller JP-SC3001-11
Three-Phase, AC180-250V
Motor power supply
22.6-31.4A 50/60Hz (5kW)
Press unit (Stroke 100) 100W x 306D x 570H (mm), 43kg
Dimensions and Press unit (Stroke 200) 100W x 306D x 690H (mm), 50kg
weight (excluding Press unit (Stroke 300) 100W x 306D x 810H (mm), 56kg
cables/protruding Press unit (Stroke 350) 100W x 306D x 870H (mm), 60kg
parts) Press unit (Stroke 400) 100W x 306D x 930H (mm), 63kg
Controller 147W x 188D x 365H (mm), 8kg
Noise Max 78.1dB *4

*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.

*2 With the JP-S3001-11, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately
17kN. Holding times are very short if the maximum load (30kn) is applied. (Depending on conditions,
such as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the
affordable holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the
maximum affordable holding time is shortened. Please make sure to set pressing conditions with
enough allowance for possible errors.

*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity.
The load accuracy value represents when pressing with the unit and environment at a constant
temperature.
This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection, and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.

*4 Sound level measured at a distance of 1 m.

NOTE
• Please understand that the specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to
improve quality.

Functions 230 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S 5001
Specifications JP-S5001
Maximum pressing capacity 50kN (5100kgf)
Load detection denomination*1 20N
Stroke 200mm/300mm/400mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01-200mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01-35mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±500N for 5kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 50kg
Compatible controller JP-SC5001
Three-Phase, AC180-250V
Motor power supply
22.6-31.4A 50/60Hz (5kW)
Dimensions and Press unit (Stroke 200) 182W x 407D x 979H (mm), 121kg
weight (excluding Press unit (Stroke 300) 182W x 407D x 1099H (mm), 134kg
cables/protruding Press unit (Stroke 400) 182W x 407D x 1219H (mm), 145kg
parts) Controller 147W x 188D x 365H (mm), 8kg
Noise Max 85dB *4

*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.

*2 With the JP-S5001, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately 20kN.
Holding times are very short if the maximum load (50kn) is applied. (Depending on conditions, such
as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the affordable
holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the maximum
affordable holding time is shortened. Please make sure to set pressing conditions with enough
allowance for possible errors.

*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity.
The load accuracy value represents when pressing with the unit and environment at a constant
temperature.
This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection, and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.

*4 Sound level measured at a distance of 1 m.

NOTE
• Please understand that the specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to
improve quality.

Functions 231 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S 5R01
Specifications JP-S5R01
Maximum pressing capacity 50kN (5100kgf)
Load detection denomination*1 20N
Stroke 200mm/350mm/400mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01-200mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01-35mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±500N for 5kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 50kg
Compatible controller JP-SC5R01
Three-Phase, AC180-250V
Motor power supply
22.6-31.4A 50/60Hz (5kW)
Dimensions and Press unit (Stroke 200) 150W x 365D x 743H (mm), 110kg
weight (excluding Press unit (Stroke 350) 150W x 365D x 893H (mm), 129kg
cables/protruding Press unit (Stroke 400) 150W x 365D x 943H (mm), 135kg
parts) Controller 147W x 188D x 365H (mm), 8kg
Noise Max 85dB *4

*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.

*2 With the JP-S5R01, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately 20kN.
Holding times are very short if the maximum load (50kn) is applied. (Depending on conditions, such
as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the affordable
holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the maximum
affordable holding time is shortened. Please make sure to set pressing conditions with enough
allowance for possible errors.

*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity.
The load accuracy value represents when pressing with the unit and environment at a constant
temperature.
This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection, and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.

*4 Sound level measured at a distance of 1 m.

NOTE
• Please understand that the specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to
improve quality.

Functions 232 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S 10T1
Specifications JP-S10T1
Maximum pressing capacity 100kN (10200kgf)
Load detection denomination*1 40N
Stroke 200mm/400mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01-100mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01-16mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±1000N for 10kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 100kg
Compatible controller JP-SC10T1
Three-Phase, AC180-250V
Motor power supply
22.6-31.4A 50/60Hz (5kW)
Dimensions and Press unit (Stroke 200) 210W x 420D x 1217H (mm), 250kg
weight (excluding Press unit (Stroke 400) 210W x 420D x 1417H (mm), 295kg
cables/protruding
parts) Controller 147W x 188D x 365H (mm), 8kg
Noise Max 70.5dB*4

*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.

*2 With the JP-S10T1, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately 30kN.
Holding times are very short if the maximum load (100kn) is applied. (Depending on conditions,
such as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the
affordable holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the
maximum affordable holding time is shortened. Please make sure to set pressing conditions with
enough allowance for possible errors.

*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity.
The load accuracy value represents when pressing with the unit and environment at a constant
temperature.
This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection, and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.

*4 Sound level measured at a distance of 1 m.

NOTE
• Please understand that the specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to
improve quality.

Functions 233 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S 10R1
Specifications JP-S10R1
Maximum pressing capacity 100kN (10200kgf)
Load detection denomination*1 40N
Stroke 200mm/400mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01-100mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01-16mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±1000N for 10kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 100kg
Compatible controller JP-SC10R1
Three-Phase, AC180-250V
Motor power supply
22.6-31.4A 50/60Hz (5kW)
Dimensions and Press unit (Stroke 200) 200W x 465D x 889H (mm), 198kg
weight (excluding Press unit (Stroke 400) 200W x 465D x 1089H (mm), 235kg
cables/protruding
parts) Controller 147W x 188D x 365H (mm), 8kg
4
Noise Max 70.5dB*

*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.

*2 With the JP-S10R1, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately 30kN.
Holding times are very short if the maximum load (100kn) is applied. (Depending on conditions,
such as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the
affordable holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the
maximum affordable holding time is shortened. Please make sure to set pressing conditions with
enough allowance for possible errors.

*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity.
The load accuracy value represents when pressing with the unit and environment at a constant
temperature.
This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection, and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.

*4 Sound level measured at a distance of 1 m.

NOTE
• Please understand that the specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to
improve quality.

Functions 234 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S 20T1
Specifications JP-S20T1
Maximum pressing capacity 200kN (20400kgf)
Load detection denomination*1 80N
Stroke 200mm/400mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01-50mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01-8mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±2000N for 20kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 200kg
Compatible controller JP-SC20T1
Three-Phase, AC180-250V
Motor power supply
22.6-31.4A 50/60Hz (5kW)
Dimensions and Press unit (Stroke 200) 260W x 446D x 1426H (mm), 350kg
weight (excluding Press unit (Stroke 400) 260W x 446D x 1626H (mm), 400kg
cables/protruding
parts) Controller 147W x 188D x 365H (mm), 8kg
Noise 70dB or less

*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.

*2 With the JP-S20T1, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately 60kN.
Holding times are very short if the maximum load (200kn) is applied. (Depending on conditions,
such as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the
affordable holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the
maximum affordable holding time is shortened. Please make sure to set pressing conditions with
enough allowance for possible errors.

*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity.
The load accuracy value represents when pressing with the unit and environment at a constant
temperature.
This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection, and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.

NOTE
• Please understand that the specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to
improve quality.

Functions 235 Electro Press JP-S


 Common specifications
Specifications All models
Repeatability*1 ±0.01mm
Life cycle*2 Varies depending on operation conditions
Ambient temperature 0 – 40°C
Ambient relative humidity Between 20 to 90 percent and without condensation
Controller power supply DC24V±10% 1.6A
Number of programs Up to 512*3
Number of load zone sensors One sensor for each program (up to 32 zones) *3
Number of program sensors Up to 16 (in a single program) *3
Number of steps Up to 512 (in a single program) *3
Number of step sensors Up to 16 (in a single step) *3
You can save result data to the controller. Backups are made
with battery power and are not deleted even if the controller
Saving result data
power is shut down. Capacity is approximately 500k byte.
Equivalent to 300 seconds of sampling data.

*1 The repeatability value represents when pressing with fixed load conditions and with the unit and
environment at a constant temperature. Repeatability does not guarantee absolute accuracy.
When the ram expands due to heat, the absolute positions vary. For applications where continued
operation causes problems due to the effects of a rise in temperature, you need to get the press into
a state of thermal equilibrium by warming it up before using it.

**2 The life of expendable parts such as ball screws, etc., depend on the operation conditions.
Please refer to “8. Replacing Expendables” in the operation manual Setup and Maintenance for
further details.

*3 The number of programs, steps, and sensors depend on the total memory size (approximately 1
MB).

 Affordable pressing time (Standby Time, Duty)


The necessary standby time in between pressing depends on operation conditions. If using strict work
conditions, you need to have a period of cool down to make sure the motor does not get too hot.
Depending on operation conditions, you cannot run repeatedly without a standby time and therefore
you need to take time in between runs. If pressing with a large load for a long pressing distance or with
a long holding time, you need to take a long stand-by time. If the motor surface temperature
exceeds 100°C, an error occurs. Please make sure to set a standby time so the temperature stays
under 100°C.

Functions 236 Electro Press JP-S


Refer to the graphs on the next page for the pressing time in relation to the load.
The operation conditions for the graphs are as follows.
• Approaching distance ····················56mm
• Approaching speed ·······················Maximum
• Approaching acceleration ···············Maximum
• Approaching deceleration ···············Maximum
• Pressing speed ····························35mm/sec

Speed

Pressing
Approach Return Stand-by time
time

Time

Pressing is performed until the press reaches the specified position. The pressing time is considered
the pressing phase + the stop time.

The graphs describe limit lines with load on the horizontal axis and pressing time on the vertical axis for
stand-by times of 1, 2, 3, 5 and 10 seconds.
Operate the press in the range under these lines.

You can repeatedly press with a standby time of 0sec if pressing with less than 3.8kN for the JP-S1001,
less than 7kN for the JP-S2001 or less than 11kN for the JP-S3001 (the limit lines are cut-off at this
point in the graphs on the next page) however, measure the temperature of the motor with long
approaches and if the temperature is high, you may need to take time for a stop.

Functions 237 Electro Press JP-S


Use the press within a range that does not exceed a motor
surface temperature of 100°C.
Using the press when it has exceeded 100°C causes electric shock
and breakdown.
Warning If the motor does exceed 100°C, take steps to reduce the
temperature of the press by cooling it, taking longer standby times,
and having shorter pressing times, etc. Use the press after
confirming the motor temperature is less than 100°C.

 JP-S0501

JPS-0501 加圧可能時間
JPS-0501 Possible pressing time

6
Stand-by time
5
待機時間10s
10s
加圧時間[s]

8s
待機時間8s
Pressing Time [s]

4
5s
待機時間5s
3s
待機時間3s
3 2s
待機時間2s
1s
待機時間1s
2

0
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
Load [KN]
荷重[KN]

Functions 238 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S0501-01

JP-S0501-01 Possible Pressing Time

Stand-by time
6

5 10s
待機時間10s
Pressing Time [s]

5s
待機時間5s
4
3s
待機時間3s
3
2s
待機時間2s

2 1s
待機時間1s

0
3 3.5 4 4.5 5
Load [KN]

 JP-S1001

JP-S1001 圧可能時間
JP-S1001 Possible Pressing Time

6
Stand-by time

5
10s
待機時間10s
加圧時間[s]
Pressing Time [s]

5s
待機時間5s
4 3s
待機時間3s
2s
待機時間2s
1s
待機時間1s
3

0
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Load [KN]
荷重[KN]

Functions 239 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S1001-01

JPS-1001-01
JP-S1001-01 加圧可能時間
Possible Pressing Time

5 Stand-by time
Pressing Time [s]

待機時間
10s
4
加圧時間[s]

10s
待機時間5s
5s
3s
待機時間3s
3 2s
待機時間2s

1s
待機時間1s
2

0
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Load [KN]
荷重[KN]

 JP-S1501

JP-S1501 加圧可能時間
JP-S1501 Possible Pressing Time

7 Stand-by time

6 待機時間10s
10s
5s
待機時間5s
Pressing Time [s]

5
加圧時間[s]

3s
待機時間3s
4 2s
待機時間2s
1s
待機時間1s
3

0
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
荷重[KN]
Load [KN]

Functions 240 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S2001

JP-S2001
JP-S2001 加圧可能時間
Possible Pressing Time

7
Stand-by time
6
待機時間10s
10s
Pressing Time [s]

5
加圧時間[s]

5s
待機時間5s
4 3s
待機時間3s
2s
待機時間2s
3 1s
待機時間1s

0
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
荷重[KN]
Load [KN]

 JP-S2001-01

JP-S2001-01
JP-S2001-01 加圧可能時間
Possible Pressing Time

4.5
Stand-by time
4
待機時間
10s
3.5 10s
3
Pressing time [s]

待機時間
5s
加圧時間[s]

5s
2.5
3s
待機時間
2 3s
1.5 2s
待機時間
2s
1
0.5
0
10 12 14 16 18 20
Load [KN]
荷重[KN]

Functions 241 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S3001

JP-S
JP-S 3001 3001 加圧可能時間
Possible Pressing Time

4.5 Stand-by time


4
10s
待機時間10s
3.5
3 5s
待機時間5s
Pressing Time [s]
加圧時間[s]

2.5
3s
待機時間3s
2
1.5 2s
待機時間2s
1
0.5
0
10 15 20 25 30
Load [KN]
荷重[KN]

 JP-S5001

JP-S5001 Possible Pressing Time

Stand-by time

10s

5s
Pressing Time[s]

3s

2s

1s

Load [KN]

Functions 242 Electro Press JP-S


 JP-S10T1

JP-S
JP-S10T1 10T1Pressing
Possible 加圧可能時間Time

10 Stand-by time

9s
待機時間9s
8
12s
待機時間12s
Pressing time[s]

6
加圧時間[s]

15s
待機時間15s

4 20s
待機時間20s

待機時間25s
25s
2

0
50 60 70 80 90 100
Load [KN]
荷重[KN]

 JP-S20T1

JP-SPossible
JP-S20T1 20T1 Pressing
加圧可能時間Time

5
Stand-by time
4
15s
待機時間15s
20s
Pressing time[s]

3 待機時間20s
加圧時間[s]

25s
待機時間25s

2 30s
待機時間30s
35s
待機時間35s
1

0
100 120 140 160 180 200
Load [KN]
荷重[KN]

Functions 243 Electro Press JP-S


MEMO

Functions 244 Electro Press JP-S


10. GLOSSARY

【A】 Approach
ACK After the program starts, from the work starting
An input signal to display when handling is position to the position where pressing begins.
complete when the sending of data output Existence or non-existence, rather the
occurs. An abbreviation for ‘Acknowledgement’. parameter regarding the operation is set from
the program data.
Address
The number used to specify the I0 memory Approach Enable/Disable
data domain. There is a 1 bit unit for specifying A Setting included within the program used to
the relay number and a number to specify with decide whether or not pressing is carried out.
a 16 bit unit to specify the register number. Settings are the below types. The default
setting is ‘enabled’.
Alarm Existence: After the program starts, the ram
1. The conditions that show the occurrence of moves at full speed until it reaches the specified
abnormalities that influence the operation. position at which point probing is executed.
The alarm sounds and the operation is ‘Disables’: After the program operation starts,
terminated. probing is executed.
The ‘alarm number’ indicates the
nature/content of the abnormality. The Area Codes
‘alarm number’ is a failure diagnosis The numbers used to identify devices that are
function in JP Designer. This or the ‘Alarm connected to the field bus network.
Failure No.1’ can confirm the cause of the
trouble. 【B】
Remove the cause of the alarm and when Big Endian
the ‘alarm reset’ special relay is ON, the When handling large byte data, the method to
alarm will be cancelled. arrange the data top to bottom. At the time of
2. One of the functions assigned to the I0 Ethernet interfacing, this method is used.
memory. Assign it to the relay number and
use. Bit
The number that displays the alarm. When This is the smallest unit of electronic data,
the alarm occurs, it becomes ON, in when indicated by a single binary digit, either a 0 or a
the cause of the alarm is removed, the 1.
alarm will turn OFF when the ‘alarm reset’ is The IO memory relay has a single bit domain.
put ON. Reference: Functions (4.2.2 8 bits = 1 byte, 16 bits = 1 word
Common Function (2) Errors) Refer to: Byte
Word

Functions 245 Electro Press JP-S


Brake 【D】
A function of the JP-S body. When the power Deceleration
source is OFF, it maintains the position of the The speed the ram decelerates during
ram. Enable and disable can be selected operation.
depending on the press unit specifications.
Deceleration Load Rate
Byte The percentage unit parameter that is used with
This is an electronic data unit consisting of an 8 fixed speed pressing/set hold load as well as
digit binary number. In decimal numbers, if can fixed speed pressing and additional load hold
indicate a value from 0 to 255 without using a modes. The unit is (%). Its function is to
code. increase the precision of the load hold and once
1 byte = 8 bits; 2 bytes = 1 word the ratio of the object load if the percentage of
The IO memory register has a domain for 2 the current load against the target load meets
bytes (equaling 1 word). the value set in this parameter, the pressing
Refer to: Bit speed decreases to 1.0mm/s.
Word Refer to: “3.4.2 Slow Down Load Rate/Stop
Reference Point Position.”
【C】 Load Calibration
Command Codes
These numbers are used to designate the Digital Output
content of various operations when operating  See JOG Operation
the program creation register. To write numbers
into the register, enter the first number of the DIO
inputted registry +1. Digital input ‘Digital Input/Output’.
Refer to: Functions “4.2.8 Program Setting The interface for exchanging with external
Register” devices using an ON/OFF digital signal.
Alternatively, the signal itself.
Check sum The menu relating to the above settings of the
A code used with the RS-232C interface for interface. For every single machine there is one
detecting errors. setting and it influences all programs. The
In the interface data, each individual digit is setting occurs in JP-S Designer.
added together and then this two-digit code Reference: Functions “5.3 Digital input/output
(one word) is added after the total body of data. (DI0) setting”.
By attaching it to the tail end of the data, it
serves to check and see whether or not the Differential
body of data is damaged. A differential or inclination, in the JP-S this
refers to the load change rate.

Functions 246 Electro Press JP-S


Differential Judgment distance and load. When the signal symbol
This Judgment applies to the point when turns OFF, it stops.
changes to the load (inclination) cause the load Refer to “4.2.5 External Running”
value to exceed a designated value. The
Judgment whether or not a differential has 【F】
occurred comes with a set load increase Fieldbus
(inclination Judgment value) and the sensor A digital interfacing method used primarily with
determines whether or not the measured industrial machinery. Through PLC (power line
volume increase exceeds this value. communication), the superior device (master)
If the standard unit of measurement is controls the inferior device (slave) by
time-based (N/s) the parameter is differential 1, integrating the inferior device’s data. Multiple
if it is distance-based (N/mm) it is differential 2. standard types exist, with the JP-S compatible
with DeviceNet, CC-Link and Profibus.
Drive
The process of using power to make something FROM
move. In the case of the JPS, the drive power Flash ROM abbreviation. Even if the power
makes the ram operate. Also, this term is used source is cut, the memory remains.
to refer to pressing.
Function Assignment
【E】 The job of setting a special relay/special
Encoder register to the memory domain.
A device incorporated in the motor for detecting When this is done, the special relay/special
the current position. register function is able to be used from the
external device.
Event Termination  Special relay/special register
One kind of pressing operation method in which
when a specific relay is ON, pressing stops. Function code
The relay that becomes the standard relay for The number that designates the content of the
operation is calling the ‘event stop relay’. operations to be performed which are sent in
the input/output data using Ethernet or
External connection domains RS-232C interfacing. The code comes at the
Within the data domains, the domain for 4th digit of the hexadecimal number after the
operating external devices. Digital data interface data number. Refer to “7.Ethernet”
input/output is made using fieldbus, Ethernet, and “8.RS-232C”
for RS-232C.

External instruction Operation


One kind of special relay/special register.
When the instruction signal is ON, movement
occurs with regard to a specified position,

Functions 247 Electro Press JP-S


【G】 【I】
Gain I0 Memory
A parameter used to calculate the operational The area name of ‘external interface domain’
speed when the pressing occurs with the fixed and ‘internal domain used in program data’
load control. The unit is (%) and, proportional together. With the relay register number, specify
gain, integral gain and differential gain exist. the address (domain). – External connection
It shows the sensitivity of difference in between domain.
the target load and the current load in the
speed and the bigger these values, the more Inching
rapid the change to the pressing speed. The method pressing by making small
Reference: “2.6 Constant Load Movement indentations in small distances. In the JP-S, this
Gain” is largely handled by the JOG operation.
 JOG Operation
Gain Table
A table containing proportional gain, integral Inclination Value
gain, differential gain parameters. The parameter that is set by differential 1
16 tables can be registered. When the fixed Judgment and differential 2 Judgments.
load control is specified in the pressing mode, When the load increments per time unit
the table number is determined. (differential 1 Judgment) as well as per unit
 Gain length (differential 2 Judgment), exceed this
value, it is assumed there is a differential
【H】 occurrence. The units are (N/s) in addition to
Home Position (N/mm).
The position that is the base coordinate of the  Differential
ram. Coordinate positions are measured by
how far the ram has moved from this position. Internal Domain
The home position is determined by ‘Home Within the IO memory, there is a domain that is
Position Adjustment’. This is also the not for external interfacing.
mechanical initialization home position. It is used by the internal program data.
 Refer to I0 memory
Home Position Adjustment
The function that that sets the position of the Internal Register
RAM when it returns to home position. The internal domain relay. The address range is
The coordinates set by this function become C00-FFF.
the zero coordinates. Refer to: Setup and
Maintenance “9.4 Setting the Ram Projection Internal relay
Length and Home Position” The internal domain relay. The address range is
C000-FFFF.

Functions 248 Electro Press JP-S


【J】 Refer to “3. Program Runs”
JOG commands
When the relay signal is assigned, input from Judgment Range
external devices becomes possible. This is where the ram stops pressing before it
 JOG movement/JOG pressing enters the Judgment range. The parameter
 Special relay – Special register settings determine whether or not the
Judgment is OK or NG (no
JOG Environment Data Settings good-unacceptable).
The menu for setting the operational settings
related to the items of JOG. Judgment Value
Each machine has one setting and affects all The value that becomes the subject of the
programs. The settings occur in JP-S Designer. Judgment.
JOG speed, JOG inching distance and JOG In addition, it also refers to the value of the
mode maximum load can be set. parameter that is subject to Judgment at the
Refer to “2.3 JOG Environment Settings.” time when such Judgment is made.

JOG Operation Judgment Value Range


A function to operate the ram only when the This refers to the range of Judgment values that
movement command signal is ON. would be judged as OK (acceptable).
If the length of the signal is 500msec or less, it
only operates the specified distance (the 【L】
inching distance) and then stops (Inching Limit Positions
operation) at the designated speed. If the signal This parameter sets the lower limit for the ram,
continues for more than 500msec, continue it can descend during operation. It exists for
operation until the signal turns OFF. JOG1 movements such as probing, load stop
contains UP/DOWN and various command pressing, etc. which are not controlled by
signals, JOG2 to move to the coordinate coordinates.
position and JOG3 to move to the coordinate If the ram moves beyond the position set here,
weight are all available features. a “Limit Position Error” (1008) occurs.
Refer to “4.2.7 JOG Functions.”
Linear Encoder
Judgment This is a device which detects the position of
This function examines program results to see the straight line axis and outputs it as position
whether or not load and position values are data. It is used to correct changes in the ball
within designated ranges. screw due to thermal expansion and position
Judgments include the “step Judgment” made variance from vibration.
while carrying out a step and the “end of step
Judgment” made when the step is completed, Little Endian
as well as the “end of program Judgment” This is a method of handling large byte data by
made when all the steps are complete. lining up the byte data bottom to top. This

Functions 249 Electro Press JP-S


method is used for arranging the data for Load Review
multiple registers in the IO memory. The job of setting the load correction value to
be added to the load detected by the load cell.
Load Cell Refer to Setup and Maintenance “9.3 Load
By converting the applied pressure into Adjustments.”
electrical current, this device makes a real-time
detection of the applied load value. Load Value
A part built into the JP-S main unit whose The combined value of the load detected by the
function is to manage the load. It can be load cell (the read load value) combined with
calibrated using “load cell calibration” found in the load correction value. The JP-S indicator
the “adjustment and fault diagnosis” menu. shows the force applied to the workpiece.
Also, using the optional “load cell output” However, when the value is wrong, it differs
connector, it can output the current it detects. from the actual applied force. When this
Refer to: Setup and Maintenance “9.2 Load Cell happens, it is necessary to perform a load
Amplifier Output Adjustment.” calibration so as to accurately calculate load
corrections.
Load Offset Automatic Reset  Load calibration
A function to automatically set and correct the
load offset value with a particular timing. When Lower limit NG
using this function, after returning of the origin is In the case that the executed program result
complete, or at the time of program completion, NG case that the program execution result has
the final load value becomes OkN and the load a smaller value than the Judgment result range.
offset value is automatically calculated and set.
 Load offset value Longword
 Refer to “2.1.2 Adjustment Data” A data length of 2 words = (32 bit)
 Refer to word
Load Offset Value
A parameter for the calculation of the load value. 【M】
Add this value to the detected load value, and Malfunction
lastly calculate the load value. → Detected The state displays the possibility of that parts of
load value the JP-S interior have developed abnormalities.
 Load offset automatic reset When this occurs, the press stops operating
Refer to “2.1.2 Adjustment Data”. and it is not possible to run programs. In
addition, LED’s 2 and 3 of the main controller
will start to blink.
Details of the malfunction can be identified with
the ‘Malfunction Numbers’. The ‘Malfunction
Number’ that appears can be confirmed using
the malfunction diagnosis function of the JP-S
Designer software as well as

Functions 250 Electro Press JP-S


‘Alarm/Malfunction Numbers 1’ in the special
register. Eliminate the cause of the problem and Monitor Output
turn the power back ON and the (shut down One of the functions that can be used with the
due to) malfunction status is removed. special relay/special register that writes the
Refer to: Setup and Maintenance “6.2 Error current position and current load into the
Number List” specified register.
The interval for renewing the value is
Maximum Load designated in ‘Monitor IO Renewal Period’ in
The maximum value of the load is what that the ‘Parameters’ menu.
body can carry. It is decided according to the Refer to “4.2.6 Monitor Output Function”
main unit’s specifications and alteration cannot
be made. Monitor Strobe
When a load that exceeds the value is detected, One of the functions usable with the special
‘2007 maximum load error’ occurs and the relay/special register, with a 1bit signal it turns
press stops. OFF in time with the renewal of the current
position and current load values from the
Maximum Pressing Power “Monitor Output”.
A parameter found in the “Fixed Speed/Position
Hold”, “Fixed Speed/Distance Hold” and “Fixed Multistage Operation
Speed/Event Hold” pressing modes. If a load Operations with multiple operation steps.
value exceeding this parameter is detected
while pressing, the error code 1000 “maximum 【N】
load error” occurs. NG
When the executed program result has is
Maximum Stroke outside of the Judgment result range.
The maximum coordinate that the ram can When over the upper limit, it becomes over
press. It is defined in the main unit’s limit: NG, when under the lower limit, it
specifications and cannot be altered. If an becomes under limit: NG.
attempt to exceed the maximum stroke is made, Operation after NG has occurred settings can
‘1001 maximum stroke error’ will occur and it be made as to whether to continue the program
will be terminated. or finish the program for each Judgment item.
 Judgment
Mechanical Home Position
 Refer to: Home Position Numerical Types
The identifiers for function assignments in the
Monitor IO Renewal Cycle I/O memory, refers to the type used to
One of the “parameters” in the setting menu, it designate function assignments made for the
is used for setting the renewal interval for the register address, as well as the relay address +
“current value” handled by the monitor output. data width.
Refer to “2.2 Parameters” Refer to: Register

Functions 251 Electro Press JP-S


elements, namely the variance, integration and
【O】 differentiation between the target value and the
Out of Judgment Range output value.
This is where the ram stops pressing before it
enters the Judgment range. The parameter PLC
settings determine whether or not the The control device into which CPU and memory
Judgment is OK or NG (no is built in. Connects to another device and
good-unacceptable). handles signals and the sending and receiving
and data
OK Abbreviation of ‘Programmable Logic
When the executed program result is within the Controller’
range of Judgment result.
 Judgment Port
With TCP/IP communication (interfacing), this is
Operation Start Position the support address set under the IP address. It
This is the coordinate that completes the is set when there are multiple Ethernet
approach and moves to the probing function. interfaces in one device.
Set in the program data. Although it has a range from 0 to 65535, with
Refer to the operational manual Functions. the JP-S “10028: Result Data Acquisition” and
“10029: IO Memory Control” can be used.
【P】
Parameter Position Offset
This is a value for determining operating This parameter offsets against the mechanical
conditions. This term can be used to indicate initialization position. When a parameter is set
the kind of value to be set, or the set value for this parameter, it offsets against the set
itself. distance for the position as determined by the
This is the setting menu for data acquisition ‘home position adjustment’ and this offset
when the press is operating. position becomes the work home position.
Each unit has one setting and it affects all
operating programs. Settings are made using Position Zone Output
JP-S Designer. When the ram tip is within a set position range,
“Monitor IO Renewal Period”, “Result Data this function will turn a specified relay ON.
Saving Mode”, “Differential Judgment Sampling
Interval” can all be set. Power Source
 Refer to Electrical Power Source

PID Control
One kind of feedback control method where
control of the input values is done through three

Functions 252 Electro Press JP-S


Power Supply Probing
The power supply that feeds the motor and When a program is run, this is the low speed
drives the ram. movement between the point where the ram
The current is either triple phase or single reaches the position to begin pressing (end of
phase, AC180 – 250V. approach) until the sensor detects the point
While the power source is being fed, the ram where the ram touches the work piece (point of
can be operated. In addition, when this is ON, contact). However, when there is no approach
the ram operation power source condition’ of in the program, the ram begins this operation as
the special relay is ON. soon as the program begins.
Enabling/disabling probing in the program as
Pressing well as various movement parameters are
Describes the period the motor drives the ram included in the program data.
from the position where the step begins, until
the pressing completion conditions are met or, Probing Enabled/Disabled
the position or load limit is exceeded. The The setting that is included in the program data
operational parameters are determined by the that decides whether the probing occurs or not.
pressing mode set for that given stop. The settings are the below 2 types. The default
 Pressing mode setting is ‘Enabled’.
 Step Enabled: After approach is complete, the ram
begins to probe before pressing.
Pressing Mode Disabled: The ram starts immediately after
A type of ram function (ways of moving and completing approach.
stopping) in the step. 9 types exist and 1 type of
operation mode is specified in each step. Program
The usage mode is determined by a A group of settings related to a series of
combination of the parameters that control the operations, from the start of operations to the
RAM workings (speed, load) and the operation ram’s return to the work home position. It
completion items (speed, load and time etc.) includes program settings themselves, steps
and Judgments, etc. Each program is identified
Pressing time hold by a number from 1 to 512.
This indicates the designated interval of time Programs can be created and edited using
when the ram holds after pressing JP-S Designer or the program creation register.
 Pressing operation Refer to “3. Program Runs”

Pressing Speed Program Data


The speed at which the RAM moves during The collective term for the setting data used to
pressing. operate the program.

Functions 253 Electro Press JP-S


Program Home Position Ram Protrusion Length
One of the program setting types. After the ram One of the setting items for the “Home Position
finishes pressing, it returns to this position and Adjustment” function, this is the distance from
stops running. However, when the program is the flange attachment surface to the ram tip.
set so that the ram does not return, then it will Refer to: Home Position Adjustment
not do so.
In addition, when the “move to program home Regenerative Resistor
position” command in the special relay/register The resistor that assimilates the regenerative
is used, then the ram will move to the home energy that is generated during operation of the
position for that program. motor. As the amount of regenerative energy
depends on the size of the load, there is a
【Q】 possibility that assimilation cannot be done with
Quality Control Data the standard regenerative resistor. In this case,
The data recorded for each parameter when the user should consider fitting an external
running a program. resistor to the JP-S as an option. However,
The following parameters are recorded: depending on the operating conditions, there is
• Date and time program is run a possibility that even with use of an external
• Number of steps resistor, assimilation is not possible.
• Judgment results Reference: Setup and Maintenance
• Work touching position/load ”3.11 Regenerative Resistor”
• Program end position/load
• Program operating results Register
When the JP-S main unit is in “Result Data This is a method for IO memory domain
Storage Mode”, “Quality Control Data” and designation. It designates domains in 2 bit units
“Quality Control Data + Operation Time Series through 3 digit hexadecimal addresses. It is
Data” are stored and the result values can be used for data exchanges of numerical values,
called up on JP-S Sampler or through the etc.
Ethernet.
Refer to: Result Data Relay
Time Series Data 1. A device in which the opening/closing of the
electric circuit occurs. By the receiving of
【R】 the electric signal, the increase/decrease of
Ram the electric current, the signal will
This is the name of the part driven up and down communicate ON/OFF.
(or back and forth) by the motor which presses 2. One of the methods to set the domain of the
the work piece. IO memory. With the address of the 4 digit
of the 16 binary numbers, specify the
domain of the 1bit unit. It can have a 0 or a
1 value, and in order to assign a condition
can be represented by ON/OFF signals.

Functions 254 Electro Press JP-S


Relay Type Return Enabled/Disabled
Attributes of the function assigned to IO Included in the program data, this setting
memory. The type of function is the type that determines whether or not the press will make a
specified the assignment destination domain by return movement. It operates as described
the relay address. below. There are two settings, with “Enabled”
 Relay - as the default setting.
Enabled: After pressing, the ram returns to the
RS232C program home position.
1. The interface for data exchange with Disabled: After pressing, the program ends.
external devices. Compliant with the US
EIA (Electronic Industries Alliance) Return to Home Position
standard, this interface is standard The function that moves the RAM to the home
equipment with the JP-S. position and resets the encoder of the motor.
2. The settings menu for the above interface. This must be performed one time after power is
Each machine has one setting which affects switched ON.
programs. The settings are made using However, this does not need to be performed a
JP-S Designer. second time after the power to the drive motor
Refer to “5.3 Digital Input/Output (DIO) is shut OFF. This is because the encoder
Settings” confirms the position of the ram even when the
power to the drive motor is OFF.
Result Data
The value of the result of a program that has Running a program
been run. It consists of the time series data This is the actual carrying out of the operations
combined with the quality control data. After a set in a given program. When the IO memory
program is run, the result data is stored in the (relay) in which the “Program Run Command”
main unit’s memory. Once the data is output function becomes 1 the program is carried out.
externally, it is erased from the main unit’s
memory. The memory can store up to 490bytes 【S】
of result data. Sampling
 Time series data A method of monitoring the load value by taking
 Quality control data values at fixed intervals.
The values taken are sent to an external device
Return as time series data. In addition, some of the
During a program, this is the action of the ram Judgments are not of the load values
moving back to the home position after it themselves, but instead monitor the fluctuation
finishes pressing. Enable/disable, as well as of load values as a specific behavior of the
operational parameters is included in the JP-S.
program data.

Functions 255 Electro Press JP-S


Sampling Interval Shot
This is the interval where a value is taken The unit that describes how many times the
during sampling. program is run

Sampling file Special relay/Special Register


When using the JP-S Sampler this file saves A function to receive control commands from an
the result data received from the press. external device as well as output data to an
Designate the file saving location and file name external device. An external interface domain
and the file is created automatically. From then address is assigned and used.
on, incoming data is written onto this file. Refer to: “4.2 Special Relay/Special Register”
The file extension is “.csv”.
Step
Servo ON The data used for the approach, work after
A state in which the motor is being supplied with probing, pressing and pressing time hold. Up to
electrical power. 512 steps can be set for one program. When
pressing is done in multiple steps, it is referred
Servo OFF to as a multi-step program. When all steps are
A state in which the motor is not being supplied executed, the press transitions to a return
with electrical power. movement.
Various pressing modes can be set for a step,
Sensor Load Value and the control parameters are determined by
This value is the result of a load calibration the mode type.
made against the load detected by the load cell. Refer to: Pressing (pressurization)
The final load value is determined by adding the Pressing Time Hold
‘load offset value’ to this value. Pressing Mode
 Load offset value Functions “3.4 Step”
 Load calibration
Step Sensor
Slave The sensor Judgment set to a step. There are
A term used to refer to a lower device of the 17 different parameters for setting Judgment
fieldbus network that receives control types and ranges.
commands from the master. Up to 16 settings can be made for each step.
Refer to: Step
Setting Data Judgment
Collective term for data that controls JP-S Functions “3.5 Step Sensor”
functions, program data, and interface settings.
In JP-S, editing, the sending and receiving of
data can be performed.

Functions 256 Electro Press JP-S


Stop Reference Position 【T】
This is a parameter used with Fixed Speed/Set TCP/IP Protocol
Load Hold, was well as Fixed Speed/Additional The protocol standardly used on the
Load Hold Modes, its unit is mm. Internet/interface agreement. Interfacing with
This function is for increasing hold load the JP-S Ethernet also uses this agreement.
accuracy, and at the point where the ram TCP: Transmission Control Protocol (sending
reaches the set position, its pressing speed control protocol)
slows to 0.2m/s. IP: Internet Protocol (Internet Protocol)
Refer to “3.4.2 Slow Down Load Rate/Stop
Reference Position” Time Series Data
The position and load value data recorded for
Stop Time each sampling interval (5mm/sec.) In the
This is one of the setting parameters in a step. settings for the main unit the “Result Data
When the ram reaches the position which fulfills Saving Mode” saves data as “Quality Control
the condition to stop pressing, the ram stops for Data + Operational Time Series Data” and the
the duration of time set in this parameter. values can be selected using JP-S Sampler
software or through Ethernet interfacing.
Strobe Refer to: Result Data
An instantaneous input/output signal with a Quality Control Data
short input/output time; with the JP-S this refers
to a signal that is output in time with changes to Trip
the data. When a load that exceeds the motor power is
applied, the power supply is automatically cut. It
Supplementary Digits is a function to prevent motor burnout due to
The method used to display negative figures on excess current or overheating.
the binary chart. Regarding the given 2 binary
numerical values (n bit), where the first bit is 1 【U】
and the remaining bits are all 0 (if n=8 Upper limit NG
100000000) and has one more digit than the When a program is run and the result values
number of bits, the number that is subtracted are above the (sensor) Judgment range,
from the original number is said. resulting in a NG.
The original binary numerical values are Refer to: (sensor) Judgment
handled as a value that has a negative symbol
attached. 【W】
In JP-S, in order to fill in a negative value, this Warning
method is used. 1. This is an alarm to indicate an abnormality
not directly connected to a breakdown. If it
appears, it is still possible to run a program.
Using the “Warning Number”, it is possible
to identify the content of the trouble.

Functions 257 Electro Press JP-S


The “Warning Number” that comes up can Work Touching Load
be confirmed using the fault diagnosis 1. The parameter is a ‘probing’ function
function of JP-S Designer or “Alarm parameter in which at the time of the
Warning 1” of the special register. probing operation, it switches to pressing
When a warning occurs, the “Warning” once it reaches the load set in this
special relay comes ON. In addition, LED2 parameter.
on the controller’s front panel starts blinking  Refer to probing
and LED3 turns off. When the cause of the 2. This is one datum used for quality control. It
warning is removed, the warning status is is the load value at the point where the ram
canceled. starts pressing.
Refer to: Setup and Maintenance “6.2 Error Refer to: Quality Control Data
Number List”
2. This is an IO memory distribution function. It
is used by distributing relay numbers. It is a
signal for indicating that a warning has
come up. When a warning comes up it
turns ON, and when the cause of the
warning is removed, it turns OFF.
Refer to “4.2.2 Common Function (2)
Errors”

Word
Unit of the electronic data. Signifies a 16 digit
binary number. When using decimal numbers, it
can be represented by numbers 0~65536
without using a code.
1 word = 16 bits = 2 bytes
The IO memory register has the domain for one
word.
Refer to: Byte
Bit

Work Contact Position


One of the quality control data. The coordinate
value at the point when the pressing operation
starts.

Functions 258 Electro Press JP-S


Janome Sewing Machine Co., Ltd.
Industrial Equipment Sales Division
1463 Hazama-machi, Hachioji-shi, Tokyo, Japan, 193-0941
Tel: +81-42-661-6301
Fax: +81-42-661-6302

The specifications of the machine and/or the contents of this manual may be modified without
prior notice to improve quality.
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form, including photocopying, reprinting, or
translation into another language, without the prior written consent of JANOME.

ELECTRO PRESS® is a registered trademark of Janome Sewing Machine Co., Ltd.


©2010 – 2014, Janome Sewing Machine Co., Ltd., All rights reserved.

140813104 as of 2014-2

Japanese Ver. 2014-2

You might also like